Site Inspection
Training Course
Hazardous Site Control Division
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency
Washington, D.C.
-------
SITE INSPECTION TRAINING COURSE
DAY 1 MANUAL SECTION
0£QQ-0930 EPA Headquarters Program Review TAB 1
* Review discovery through NPL process current status of discovery,
PA, SI, NPL update
• Overview of remedial process
• Emergency/Enforcement considerations
• Instructor: Lucy Sibold, U.S. EPA
0930-1015 Managing Site Inspections TAB 2
* Standard Operating Procedures
• Quality Assurance
• Background Data Collection - explain why important, and sources of
information
• Instructors: Lucy Sibold U.S. EPA
Diane Trube, NUS Corporation
Steve Hann, NUS Corporation
1015-1030 Break
1030-1200 Managing Site Inspections (Continued) TAB 2
* Preparation of Work Plans/Safety Plans/Sampling Plans - discuss
format/content of work plan, safety plan, sampling plan
• QA review of documents
• Personnel Assignments/Team Organization
1200-1300 Lunch
1300-1500 Managing Site Inspections (Continued) TAB 2
* Mobilization/Equipment/Decontamination/Demobilization/Waste
Disposition
• Site Access/Community Contacts
* Sampling. Discussion of legal considerations need for control of
custody, etc.
• SI Documentation
* QA of Analytical Data
• Laboratory QA considerations.
1500-1515 Break
-------
DAY 1 (Cont.) MANUAL SECTION
1515-1700 Criteria for Further Action TAB 3
* Discussion of criteria
' Presentation of example case histories - practical exercise
• Discussion of case history evaluations
• Instructor: Lucy Sibold, U.S. EPA
-------
DAY 2 MANUAL SECTION
0&06-1000 Hazard Ranking System (MRS) TAB 4
• HRS Concept
• Problems associated with scoring
• Example problem
• Instructor: Channing Johnson, MITRE Corporation
1000-1015 Break
1015-1200 HRS Exercise TAB 4
* Additional example problem assigned to course participants
1200-1300 Lunch
1300-1400 Hazard Ranking System (Continued) TAB 4
• Answer additional questions re: HRS
1400-1500 Sampling Plan Development TAB 5
* Purposes and objectives of sampling for an SI
• HRS sampling strategy
• Example sampling plan format
• Instructor(s): Jerry Oskvarek/Mac Castor, Ecology
-------
DAY 3 MANUAL SECTION
0200-0915 Sample Collection Techniques (Continued) TAB 6
0915-1000 Sampling Quality Assurance TAB 7
• Overview and examples of the aspects of sampling having the greatest
potential for errors.
• Field logbook procedures
• Instructor(s): Jerry Oskvarek/Mac Castor, Ecology & Environment, Inc.
1000-1015 Break
1015-1130 Hazard Recognition TAB 8
* Description of types of hazards related to physical/chemical
properties of materials
• Description of activities which may alter degree of hazard
• Instructor: John Walsh, NUS Corporation
1130-1300 Lunch
1300-1*30 Elements of Site Operations TAB 9
• Team Organization/Size/Roles
• Levels of protection
* Work Zones Exclusion zone, contamination reduction zone, support
zone, etc.
• Communications Radios, line of site, etc.
• Instructor: Gary Smith, NUS Corporation
1430-1*45 Break
H
-------
DAY it
OSOO-1000 Time Period #1
1000-1200 Time Period #2
1200-1300 Lunch
1300-1500 Time Period #3
1500-1600 Course Wrap-Up
MANUAL SECTION
Practical Exercise #1 Safety Overview TAB 11
• Toxicology Overview - Discussion of toxicology as it relates to
personal safety/potential for exposure.
• Respiratory Protection - Refresher/Introductory discussion and
demonstration of respiratory protection principles and equipment.
• Levels of Protection Discussion and demonstration of protective
clothing and equipment ensembles for site inspections.
• Instructor: Gary Smith, NUS Corporation
Practical Exercise #2 Field Monitoring Instruments TAB 12
° Operation/check-out procedures
• Calibration requirements
• Exercises with instruments
Explosimeter
C>2 meter
Draeger tubes
Radiation meter
OVA
- HNu
• Instructor: Jack Peterson, NUS Corporation
-------
Day * (Cont.)
Practical Exercise S3 Site Inspection Exercise TAB 13
• Course participants organize field team
• Group given background data for a site, including site map
• Reference materials available course manual, Sax, etc.
• Each group to prepare a project work plan, safety plan, sampling
plan on basis of information provided
• Group will designate one person to give a one-half hour
presentation on the approach
• Instructor critique
• Instructor: Jerry Oskvarek/Mac Castor, Ecology & Environment, Inc.
-------
-------
1.0 SUPERFUND PROGRAM
1 .1 INTRODUCTION
The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation
and Liability Act (CERCLA or Superfund) was passed; on December 11,
1980. Among many things this law authorizes EPA to respond to
releases or threats of releases into the environment of hazardous
substances, or of a pollutant or contaminant which may present an
imminent or substantial danger to public health, welfare or the
environment.
There are three primary ways sites can be cleaned up with
CERCLA authority:
0 enforcement
0 removal
0 remedial
1. 2 ENFORCEMENT
CERCLA grants EPA broad authority to take action against
responsible parties, including owners, operators and generators,
to bring about response action at sites. Responsible parties can
be held liable for up to 3 times the cost of clean up if the Fund
has to clean up a site.
1.3 REMOVAL
The "removal" program is more commonly referred to as the
"emergency" program. The removal program (particularly immediate
removals) allow EPA to respond to releases more quickly than the
longer term remedial program without having to wait for National
Priorities List (NPL) listing. Recent proposed amendments to the
National Contingency Plan (NCP)-EPA's plan for how it will address
releases of hazardous materials-proposes to expand the removal
authority to cover situations not routinely thought of as
"emergencies". Releases or threats of releases at or near the
surface, independent of whether they pose an immediate threat,
may be addressed under the removal program. This will be discussed
in greater detail in Tab 3-Decision Criteria.
The primary limitation to "removal" actions is they can cost
no more than $1 million and last no more than 6 months unless
continued response (1) is required to prevent, limit or mitigate
an emergency, (2) there is an immediate risk, (3) and no one else
will provide the assistance.
The two key groups that oversee "removal" actions are the
Coast Guard and EPA.
-------
-2-
The Coast Guard primarily responds to releases of hazardous
materials in coastal areas and will support EPA at inland areas
when requested. EPA primarily responds to inland releases through
its contract technical assistance team (TAT) and Emergency Response
Cleanup Services Contracts (ERCS). The TAT contractor, among
other things, has responsibility for:
0 conducting preliminary assessments (for "removal" actions)
° directing removal actions
The ERCS contractor has responsibility for implementing the
selected removal actions including:
0 containment and countermeasures
0 cleanup, mitigation, and disposal
° site restoration
0 analytical services
If State personnel confront ''emergency" situations, and the
State is unable to take response action or force responsible
parties to take response actions, the site should be promptly
referred to the EPA Regional office for action.
1.4 REMEDIAL
1.4.1 DISCOVERY
Discovery is the process of identifying previously unknown
potential hazardous waste sites. Sources for this information
could include:
0 informal community site notification hot lines
0 mandated Federal/State site notification programs
0 historical or recent aerial photoimagery
0 Federal/State/local government records
0 land use records
0 other sources
All sites that are discovered by EPA or States^ are entered
into EPA's Emergency and Remedial Response Inventory System
(ERRIS). This system recently has been merged into CERCLIS.
As of today, there are over 19,000 potential hazardous waste
sites in EPA's ERRIS system.
-------
-3-
ERRIS is not a comprehensive list of all potential site
in the country—only those that have been reported to EPA.
EPA estimates that by 1986, the ERRIS list could grow to over
22,000.
1.4.2 PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENTS
The purpose of a preliminary assessment is to examine
the list of potential hazardous waste sites contained in
ERRIS to determine if a site merits further action. If
warranted, further action could include emergency response or
additional study such as a site inspection. A preliminary
assessment should characterize the hazardous substances
present, potential pollutant dispersal pathways, the population
and resources which might be affected, facility management
practices, and readily known potential responsible parties.
At this stage the person conducting the PA should begin
gathering data to support HRS scoring.
To complete a preliminary assessment, the following
types of tasks are appropriate:
0 interviews with Federal, State, and local
government personnel, and fire departments
0 files, reports, and court cases
0 review of U.S. Geological Survey, Soil Conservation
service, State Water Resources Offices, or other
comparable institutions with geological, hydrological
and topographical data
0 review of State and local private and public
well logs
0 review of federal and local meterological
data
0 review of land use data from local planning agencies
° review of available aerial imagery
0 review of flood insurance rate maps available
through the U.S. Dept. of Housing and Urban Development
0 off-site reconnaissance of site (windshield survey)
Preliminary assessments are not limited to the tasks outlined
above. A State may gather other information essential to the
assessment. However, a preliminary assessment is not "intended to
give a full and complete picture of the site. A preliminary
assessment is, by design, a quick, low cost review of existing
data to determine if the site potentially poses a problem and, if
so, what type of follow-up work should be undertaken. Accordingly,
States should not undertake tasks in a preliminary assessment
-------
-4-
that are not consistent with these objectives. These assessments
take up to 40+ workhours, on average, to complete.
1.4.3 SITE INSPECTION
The purpose of a site inspection is (1) to determine if
further action is warranted or (2) to better define the extent of
the problem at a site and provide a data base sufficient to apply
the EPA Hazard Ranking System (HRS). Further action could
include additional investigations, emergency response, NPL listing,
or enforcement. To accomplish these objectives, site specific
data on the hazardous substances present, pollutant dispersal
pathways, types of receptors, and site management practices is
gathered. The scope of an inspection can vary depending upon the
nature of existing information on the site. In general, an
initial site inspection does not include a detailed hydrological
assessment of the site. Recent EPA experience indicate that a
site inspection usually requires up to 175 recent workhours and
more in some cases.
The following types of tasks are appropriate for a site
inspections.
0 screen site with portable field instuments for aire releases,
radioactivity, buried drums/tanks
0 collect/analyze on and off-site soil, sediment
and water samples
° collect/analyze ground water samples
0 collect/analyze air samples
0 collect analyze samples from open drums or lagoons
0 survey and document site, structures, topography,
lagoons, drainage, drums, bulk tanks, monitoring
wells, roads, access points, boundaries, etc.
0 document location of potentially affected homes, public
buildings, natural areas, other populations, etc.
0 review operator records
0 HRS scoring (optional).
Under the CERCLA State PA/SI program, an average of 10-12 samples
per site is routine. States should try, where feasible, to limit
sample collection to this amount. However, this amount may not be
appropriate considering the size, complexity, nature of the
pathways and the amount of existing reliable analytical data.
If is impossible to effectively score the site with 12 samples
then it is appropriate to collect more.
-------
-5-
1.4.4 SITE INSPECTION FOLLOW-UP
A site inspection follow-up is an optional activity. In most
cases, follow-up site inspections will only be necessary for
complex sites where additional data is needed to substantiate an
HRS Score or to strengthen an HRS score. Follow-up site
inspections might also be needed to:
° further define the extent or potential for contamination
0 more extensively determine the identity/quantity of waste
materials or contaminants disposed on site
0 better identify/quantify target populations or
environments
An appropriate task under this activity includes drilling
wells to obtain better data on the presence of contaminants in
ground water. High technology subsurface survey work may be
needed during a site inspection follow-up. The more conventional
techniques can often provide enough data to score a site for the
NPL. However, where conventional techniques will not be adequate
more sophisticated technology is appropriate.
1.4.5 HRS/NPL
The Hazard Ranking System (HRS) is a model developed and
designed to rate the relative severity of a hazardous waste site
against other sites. The HRS computes a score from 1 to 100 for
each candidate site. The score is based on (1) the relative
potential of substances to cause hazardous situations, (2) the
likelihood and rate at which the substances may affect human and
environmental receptors, and (3) the severity and magnitude of
potential effects.
The National Priorities List (NPL) is a compilation of the
highest priority sites in the country. Each site included on the
NPL was scored using the HRS. Congress mandated that EPA publish
and update this list on a regular basis.
A site must be listed on the NPL eligible for remedial action.
Depending upon the scope of each State's cooperative agreement,
some States will be scoring all sites where they have done a site
inspection. In other States, the Regional office will perform
the scoring. EPA-HQ is recommending to the Regions that all sites
that receive a site inspection be scored unless there is a
documented reason for not scoring this site. An example for this
might be a situation where there is no affected population or
sensitive environment. —
-------
-6-
It is important to note at this time that enforcement activitA
is not specifically relevant to NPL considerations. EPA's policy *
is to score all sites regardless of their enforcement status.
This will ensure fair and equitable treatment of all sites.
Ultimately it is the Regions responsibility to recommend sites
for NPL consideration. However, States are the prime source of
sites recommended by the Regions. States also have a role in
reviewing and commenting on Regional recommended sites.
The following is an outline of the chronology by which sites
are submitted for NPL consideration:
0 Apply HRS scoring system
0 Submission of information/NPL package
0 Regional quality control
0 HQ quality assurance audit
0 Sites that pass QA published in Federal Register
° Sites pass through 60 day public comment period
0 Sites successfully passing through comment period are
published as final in Federal Register.
0 Litigation
When a site is submitted to EPA Headquarters for NPL
consideration, the submittal must contain the following
components :
* Complete set of HRS worksheets
e Documentation record
0 Bibliography of information sources
0 Short narrative summary for press release
Once a site has been scored using the HRS and submitted for
NPL consideration, the Region performs a quality control review.
This QC review involves:
° Ensuring that submittal is complete
0 Ensure correct arithmetic and language
0 Ensure scores for individual factors are appropriate based
on information in documentation record
0 Resolve and correct with preparer any errors or discrepancies
-------
-7-
Headquarters QA involves:
0 Ensure accurate interpretation of technical data and
arithmetic assignment of HRS values
0 Ensure consistent interregion EPA policy application
0 Ensure equitable treatment for all sites nationally
° Ensure technically valid professional judgement exercised
1.4.6 REMEDIAL INVESTIGATION (RI)
A remedial investigation is an investigation intended
to gather the data necessary to:
0 determine more precisely the nature and extent of problems
at the site
0 establish cleanup criteria for the site
0 identify preliminary alternative remedial action
0 support the technical and cost analyses of the
alternatives.
In order to conduct a remedial investigation and' all
activities subsequent to a remedial investigation, the site
must be listed on the NPL.
1.4.7 FEASIBILITY STUDY (FS)
A feasibility study is intended to:
0 evaluate alternative remedial actions from a
technical, environmental, and cost-effectiveness
perspective
0 recommend the cost-effective remedial action
° prepare a conceptual design, cost estimate for budgetary
purposes, and a preliminary construction schedule
1.4.8 REMEDIAL DESIGN (RD)
In this phase of a remedial action, the selected remedy
in clearly defined in a bid package so that the remedy can be
implemented. It can take the form of a site cleanup plan, a
relocation plan or engineering drawings and specifications.
-------
1.4.8 IMPLEMENTATION/CONCTRUCTION/REMEDIAL ACTION (RA)
The construction phase is the phase at which actual clean up
occurs based upon the designs prepared in the design phase.
Implementation can range from building containment structures,
removal of drums, installation of fences, relocation of residents,
provision of alternative water supplies, installation of site
monitoring systems, construction of clay caps, etc.
-------
-9-
REMEDIAL PROCESS FOR FUND LEAD SITES
DISCOVERY
AND
IHVESTHUTIOI
REMEDIAL
PLANNING
REMEDIAL
IMPLEMENTATION
Figure 1.
-------
-------
- I
Pfc
oc&DuK.e3
-------
SITE INSPECTION - OVERVIEW
BACKGROUND DATA COLLECTION
PREPARATION OF:
WORK/SAMPLE PLANS
SAFETY PLANS
PERSONNEL ASSIGNMENTS/
TEAM ORGANIZATION
MOBILIZATION/EQUIPMENT
SITE ACCESS/
COMMUNITY RELATIONS
FIELD WORK:
SAMPLING
OTHER FIELD ACTIVITIES
DECONTAMINATION/
DEMOBILIZATION/
WASTE DISPOSITION
REVIEW OF ANALYTICAL DATA
WRITE SI REPORT
-------
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
2.1.0 INTRODUCTION:
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) are those established methods which are
followed routinely for specific tasks, including those tasks which produce
evidentiary data and information. They are part of the foundation upon which an
office should build a major part of its work. The SOPs are a necessary instrument
within the structure of an office. By implementing SOPs the office should be able
to assure itself of the following:
o all applicable work will be performed from sound technical guidelines
o work performed will be of high quality, thus reducing the probability of errors
o documentation of the work in the event of future court action
2.1.1 PURPOSE:
The purpose of this section is to discuss the rationale for developing and
maintaining Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) for activities that require
Quality Assurance and Quality Control.
2.1.2 APPLICABILITY:
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) are instituted into the routine and repetitive
tasks that produce data that will be incorporated into the Hazardous Ranking
System (MRS) model and used as evidentiary information. It is the standardization
of these instituted procedures that become an integral part of the Quality
Assurance and Quality Control of the evidentiary information.
2.1.3 DEFINITIONS:
Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) - operations, analyses, or activities
composed of specific functions that are prescribed, documented, and accepted as
the norm for the performance of routine tasks.
Quality Assurance (QA) The total integrated program for assuring the reliability
of monitoring and measurement data.
Quality Control (QC) The routine application of procedures for obtaining
prescribed standards of performance in the monitoring and measurement process.
Comparability - A measure of the confidence with which one data set can be
compared to another.
Completeness A measure of the amount of valid data obtained from a
measurement system compared to the amount that was expected.
Precision - The degree of agreement between repeated measurements of one
property using the same method or technique.
-------
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
2.1.4 DISCUSSION:
Standard Operating Procedures are operations, analyses or actions composed of
specific functions that are prescribed, documented and accepted as the norm for the
performance of routine tasks. SOPs do not deviate from the specific activity and
are specific in direction and applicability. Briefly, SOPs are documented
compilations of detailed instructions for repetitive tasks.
The purpose of Standard Operating Procedures is to assure the data produced from
the repetitive tasks are quality assured. SOPs are an instrument of Quality
Assurance and Quality Control. SOPs assure quality control because each task is
performed in exactly the same prescribed manner each time, never deviating in
procedure from site to site, no matter who performs the task. It is this strict
compliance with no deviation that eliminates variable influences in the functions of
the task, leaving only variables for which the procedure is being monitored.
The repeated continuity in the execution of tasks produces data that has
comparability, completeness, and precision. The data must be analyzed for
comparability, completeness, and precision. Following the analysis for these three
criteria the data can be incorporated into the MRS model and used as evidentiary
information.
2.1.5 RESPONSIBILITIES:
SOPs are designed and written by experts in the field for which the SOPs are
applied. The SOPs must be tested and proven before they are implemented. They
must also be generally accepted so data generated from the SOPs are comparable to
other sets of data. When SOPs are proven, accepted, and documented they must be
implemented into the task regime of the office. It is the responsibility of the
responsible manager and the QA/QC Manager to implement the SOPs into the task
regime. Once implemented the responsible manager must insure that the SOPs are
used and provide constant training to reinforce the SOPs importance in establishing
evidentiary information.
2.1.6 PROCEDURES:
The following list identifies many of the activities associated with Site Inspections
for which SOPs will prove invaluable. An example SOP follows.
-------
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
o Quality Assurance Review and Validation of Inorganic Analysis Data
Packages
o Data Review, Reduction, and Reporting
o Ground-Water Well Sampling
o Tap-Water Sampling
o Ground-Water Level Measurement
o Determination of Ground-Water Flow and Water-Table Contour Mapping
o Preliminary Assessments
o Administration and Management of Sampling and Analysis
o Chain of Custody
o Sample Packaging and Shipping
o TCDD Sampling
o Identification of Equipment Requiring Calibration
o Monitoring, Measuring, and Test Equipment Maintenance
o Preparation of Geotechnical Framework
o Field Classification of Soil and Rock Samples
o Sampling
o Site Inspections
o Organization of the Field Team
o Control of Contaminated Material
o Legal Considerations
o Rapid Field Screening of Hazardous Substances
o Measurement of Dissolved Oxygen Concentration
o Field pH Measurement
-------
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES
o Specific Conductance Measurement
o Decontamination
o Respiratory Protection
o hNu Photoionization Detector Operation
o Organic Vapor Analyzer Operation
o General Safety Guidelines Applicable to All Field Operations
-------
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE
2.2.6 PROCEDURES
Document Control and Record-Keeping
All evidentiary documents, correspondence and reports are assigned a unique
document control number, in accordance with Table 1. These numbers are
recorded on a Document Control Records Log (Figure 2.2-1), which is maintained
with the documents in the project file.
Files are kept in a limited access area and must be signed out. Periodic file audits
are performed to check the completeness of the files, and to insure compliance
with document log procedures.
Telephone conversations are also documented as they may be referenced as
sources. Figure 2.2-2 is a sample telecon note form.
Document Review and Approval
Appropriate Document and Report Review Logs (Figures 2.2-3 and 2.2-4) are
attached to each deliverable by the author. As the document is passed through the
review system it undergoes technical and editorial reviews (Figures 2.2-5 and 2.2-
6). If approved, it is initialled and passed to the next higher level. If correction or
clarification is necessary, the document is returned with comments to the author.
A Quality Assurance officer, in additon to reviewing the document itself, checks
the review logs to see that the document is being reviewed and approved by the
appropriate personnel.
Photographic Documentation of Field Activities
During off-site and on-site investigations, photographs can provide information
which can be used to help assess the magnitude of the problem and document visual
proof of potential hazards. Because such information may provide evidence in
support of legal action, photographs and negatives must conform to document
control requirements.
Activities related to the collection of photographic evidence during on-site and
off-site investigations are to be included in the work plan. Photographs will help
document observed site conditions and will increase the evidentiary value of
samples collected in the field.
Photographs are important in documenting the cause-and-effect relationship of the
off-site migration of hazardous materials, especially with respect to environmental
damage and potential exposure to the public. Photographs should clearly
demonstrate proper field procedures. Specifically during on-site inspections,
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE
2.2.0 INTRODUCTION
Decisions concerning the control and management of hazardous wastes or the need
for enforcement actions must be based on analytical data generated during site
investigations. Since management decisions can be no better than the data on
which they are based, it is imperative that the data be of high quality. To obtain
quality data, data that are scientifically and legally defensible, and data that have
the requisite levels of precision and accuracy with minimum expenditures of
resources, it is necessary to develop a comprehensive and well-documented Quality
Assurance (QA) program. A Quality Assurance program must be incorporated into
every activity involved in the Site Inspection, including sampling site selection, the
collection, preservation, and transportion of samples, the calibration and
maintenance of instruments, and the processing, verification, and reporting of the
data. If careful attention is not paid to each of these items, it is highly probable
that invalid data will be produced. Such data waste resources, lead to bad
management decisions, and hinder enforcement actions.
2.2.1 PURPOSE
The purpose of a Quality Assurance system is:
a. to provide evidence of compliance with established operating procedures,
b. to insure that standard review and approval procedures have been
followed, and
c. to provide a method of evidentiary document identification and control.
2.2.2 APPLICATION
All evidentiary documents, including field log books, photographs and photo logs,
telecommunication memos, laboratory data, equipment calibration records, sample
management, and training records.
All deliverables, including work plans, safety plans, sample plans, Site Inspection or
Hazard Ranking System reports, and sample trip reports.
2.2.3 DEFINITIONS
None.
2.2.4 DISCUSSION
None.
2.2.5 RESPONSIBILITY
Quality Assurance procedures are to be followed by all personnel involved in any
aspect of a site investigation. The project manager is ultimately responsiclc for
the compliance with Quality Assurance Procedures in the p'v;^ration lor, and
during, the site investigation. However, the project manager may delegate sample
management and documentation to a sample management oi*f'
-------
SUBJECT
NUMBER
REVISION
PAGE 3 OF 9
EFFECTIVE DATE
- TABLE 1
EXAMPLE TDD BASED DOCUMENT CONTROL NUMBERS
Phased Work Assignments
Based on a hypothetical work assignment identified with TDOf 02-MOl-Ol with ail
vork activities are crganized with a two phase approach.
Project Control
Documents - Phase I
Document _ Work Assignment Document Code Revision
Control Number — TDD Number •*• and Phase Number * Number
Vl'ork Plan
Safety Plan
Safety Plan Follow-up
Report
Sampling Plan
Project Control
Documents - Phase 2
Work Plan
Safety Plan
Safety Plan Follow-up
Report
Sampling Plan
Deliverablea - Phase I
Sample Trip Report
?hoio Log
Deliverable^ - Phase 2
Sample Trip Report
Photo Log
02-S60l-01-'*'l-0
02-S601-01-S1-0
02-S601-01-SF1-0
02-S601-OUSP1-0
02-S601-01-VC2-0
02-S601-01-S2-0
02-360I-01-SF2-0
02-S601-01-SP2-0
02-S601-01-STR1-0
. 02-S601-01-PL1-0
C2-3SOI-01-STR2-0
02-S601-01-PL2-0
02-3601-01
02-S601-01
02-3601-01
02-3601-01
02-3601-01
02-3601-01
02-3601-01
02-S601O1
02-3601-01
02-S601-01
02-S601-01
:2-3601-Ol
Wl
si
SFl
SPl
W2
S2
SF2
SP2
STR1
PL1
5TR2
PL2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-------
FIGURE 2.2-1
HUS CORPORA JION
SUPERfUND DIVISION
QUALITY ASSURANCE RECORDS LOG \
fOO/TOO/WA:
O'2-VGGI-OI^
tilt:
SITE NO.:
CCC)C
OFFICE:
REGION II FIT
EDISON, NJ
• OO/IOO/WA MANAGERS
L C '
DOCUMENT CUSTODIAN:
L S^orx'n
PROJECT NOJ
0400.01
or 9
RECORD DESCRIPTION
DOCUMENT NO.
DATB COMPLETED
~Di
pi >c... ( oa
i.| hoc, k"
02 -S&OIOl
02- ?££>» Oirt-S i-O
^6o/-0/fl-^-2-
-OtH SP-0
02-84,01-0 \ a -P-l
i -Oi lO -STK'-O
-------
FIGURE 2.2-2
Page 5 of 9
NUS CORPORATION
TELECON NOTE
CONTROL NO:
DATE:
TIME:
DISTRIBUTION:
BETWEEN:
OF:
PHONE:
AND:
INUS)
DISCUSSION:
ACTION ITEMS:
-------
FIGURE 2.2-3 Page 6 of 9
Rev. 0
DOCUMENT/REPORT REVIEW LOG
Document Title:
Project Name:
Project Number:
Document/Report Number:
Revision Number:
Correspondence Date:
Reviewer Initial Date
Author
Project Manager
Chief Project Manager
Assist. Regional Project Manager
Regional Project Manager
QA Representative
Other
(to De used to review all technical documents)
Comments:
-------
SITE/PROJECT NAME:
TDD: ___
REPORT REVIEW CHECKLIST
FIGURE 2.2-4
Page 7 of 9
BRIC:
DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER:.
DOCUMENT NAM£r__
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
REVIEWERU);
REVIEW F.LEMENT<2) INITIAL(3)
I. 1$ the report organized in
the proper format ?
II. Is the text readable and
letter perfect?
III. Are the figures and tables
readable, letter perfect
and self explanatory?
IV. Are the tables and figures
numbered correctly?
V. Are the table of contents,
list of tables and list of
figures correct?
VI. Are the tables, figures and
references correctly identified
in the report text?
VII. Is the information and data
presented in the tables, figures
'and text consistent in the report?
VIII. Are the pages in the report
numbered correctly?
IX. Is information and data pres-
ented in the report consistent
with the field notes?
X. Is critical background/historical
information documented in the
project file?
DATE
COMMENTS*1*)
NOTES:
(1)
QC review personnel must be independent of those directly involved in tr.e
report preparation.
Indicate "NA" if the task is not applicable to the report review.
Initial only when review comment is iisposiTioned.
Continue on reverse Side if necessary.
Review Approval; QA Representative Initial,"Ja:e
-------
Page 8 of 9
FIGURE 2.2-5
DATA PRESENTATION/EVALUATION
TECHNICAL REVIEW CHECKLIST
SITE/PROJECT NAME:
TDD: BRIC: DATE:
PROJECT MANAGER: REVIEWER^:
DOCUMENT NAME:
DOCUMENT NUMBER:
REVIEW ELEMENT INITIAL^) DATE COMMENTS*3)
I. Analytical data listed
in the data presentation/evaluation
report tables correctly
presents the values listed
in the lab data pack
a) Values
b) Units of measurement
c) Significant figures
II. The information presented in
the tables in the data presentation/
evaluation report are verified
from the analytical results
presented in lab data pack
III. Can the tables in the data
presentation/evaluation report stand alone?
a) Titles and headings
b) Explanative notes
NOTE: (D QC review personnel must be independent of those who tabulated the analytical
lab data.
(2) Initial only when review comment is dispositioned.
(3) Continue on reverse side if necessary.
Review Approval; QA Representative Initial/Date /
-------
4/12/3*
Rev. 0
FIGURE 2.2-6 Page 9 of 9
TECHNICAL DOCUMENT
RECORD OF REVIEW
Reports will not be signed for transmittal to a client without a copy of the Record
of Review attached to the report following the cover sheet. The Record of Review
is not transmittted to the client.
Document Title:
Project Name:
Project Number: Brie:
Document/Report Number:
Revision Number: Due Date:
Report Status ( ): Draft Final
Author/Project Manager:
Correspondence Date:
Approval*
Reviewer (Initial) Date
Author
Project Manager
Chief Project Manager
Health
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE
photographs shall be taken at various locations to document conditions and
provide proof of potential hazards. During sampling activities, photographs must
be taken to document sample locations and help demonstrate that samples were
properly obtained. Subjects of interest for which a photo may be taken are listed
below:
1. Sampling locations.
2. Sampling activities.
3. Over-all views of the site, showing physical characteristics such as ponds
and hills or man-made features such as roads and buildings.
4. On site and adjacent land use.
Entrances, fences, access roads and gates.
Posted notices and signs displaying ownership, permits, land use, etc.
Drums or stockpiles.
5.
6.
7.
8. Leachate seeps, pools, discolored water or oil-stained soil.
A 35-mm color print and slide should be taken of each subject of interest. A
polaroid-type camera is a recommended back up.
Avoid using unusual filters, lenses or films. If these are used for any reason,
document the reason and specify the equipment used in the field logbook. All
photos are to be documented chronologically in a tabular form in the field
logbook. Documentation is illustrated in the following example:
Date
Time Photographer Sample // Roll // Frame // ID // Description of Photo
mm/dd/yy 0945 A.Thomas 123
mm/dd/yy 0950 A. Thomas 123
IP
Print
IS
Slide
J. Smith &. B. Jones
sampling at //I Main
Street. Looking SE.
Note dump in back-
ground.
In accordance with the example above, please note the following guidance when
generating a photo log.
o Indicate the time when photos and slides are taken using the 24-hour clock.
Example: 3:00 pm would translate to 1500 hours.
o When applicable, a sample number should be referenced on a site sketch or
photo location map.
o When indicating the film roll number, use a suffix of a P or S to indicate print
or slide film respectively.
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE
o Indicate the sequential frame numbers for both slides and prints. The frame
numbers in the photo log will be chronological but may not be in sequence
with the number sequence indicated on the developed slide or print negatives.
o The description of photo should be detailed enough to describe the scene
depicted.
o If practical, include in the photo some object to indicate scale.
o A sign indicating site name, sample number, date and time may be included in
the photo. This will avoid confusion in the event photos or negatives are mis-
ordered or misplaced.
o Label the photo or slide with ID number, site name, date and description.
Mapping
Maps can be invaluable in the planning of field work and in the documentation of that
work. However, it is important to keep in mind that maps prepared in the office or in
the field are evidentiary documents and must be treated with the same care and
quality assurance considerations as other evidentiary documents.
Whenever possible, site maps should be obtained or prepared prior to site visit. Work,
safety and sampling plans are much easier to describe with the use of various types of
maps. It is also easier to mark site features on a map during site inspections than to
attempt verbal descriptions or to make many quick sketches (although verbal
descriptions and sketches are helpful for confirmation of details). Site features that
should be identified on maps include (but are not limited to):
1. location of wastes, drums, stained soil, tanks, etc.
2. physically hazardous areas
3. sampling and monitoring locations
'4. buildings and man-made features
5. areas of stressed vegetation
6. points of entry and egress
7. areas of suspected contamination
Figures 2.2.-7 to 2.2-14 illustrate various types of maps typically used for site
inspections. Site maps may be obtained from the site owner or manager (these tend to
have the best detail), or can be developed from topographic maps, tax maps, or road
maps. A rough map is sufficient prior to site work, and can be completed as work
progresses. In some cases, a particularly detailed map may need to be simplified to
make one area or aspect of the site clearer.
After work is completed, the site map should be re-drawn neatly, utilizing drafting
methods if possible. In addition to a detailed site map, other types of maps which may
be useful in work and sampling plans are:
-------
1. Regional maps showing the site's relationship to surrounding areas
2. Emergency maps, showing directions to hospitals, fire houses, or telephones
3. Topographic maps
4. Geologic, groundwater, or soil maps, to help the reader understand complex
site conditions
These maps may be combined in different way to show many features on a single map.
For instance, a topographic map can be used as base map for the regional setting and
emergency routes combined.
If a map is to be sketched in the field, be sure the map is clear and all features are
labeled. Use established mapping symbols whenever possible (See Figure 2.2-15).
Indicate landmarks which can be identified on other maps or aerial photos. For
example, a building corner makes a better landmark than a forked tree, because the
building may be found on photos or topographic maps, and there is less chance for
confusion and error.
In any map, be sure to:
1. indicate north
2. indicate scale (if possible, measure some feature of the site which can be
used later to reflect scale, such as the length of a building, diameter of
standing tanks, width of a road, etc.).
3. clearly label all features and include a legend if symbols are used
'4. indicate flow directions of streams
5. indicate direction of slopes
6. be as specific as possible, for instance say "blacktop paved road" rather than
simply "road"
Remember the site may be re-visited sometime in the future, and someone else may
have to find your precise sampling locations.
2.7 RECORDS
Approved QA checklists and logs are maintained in the project file.
Photographs, negatives, maps and other quality assured documents are also to be
kept in the project file.
-------
1 — '•-«' \ <„— - — -
\YYlirU:
|
3id£ .
,
Aj\jp \ M
t)
FIGURE 2.2-7
-------
T]
o
c
3J
m
to
k>
i
o>
VALLEY BROOK AVENUE
MEADOWS .„;.
'"' ••NJM3-S2
.. "' k NJM3-SW2
, ' NJM3-SW 1^
" -. NJM3-S1
NJM3-S4
OLD
FOUNDATION
A L 1 Y L CHI
OMlOt f \
TANK 3 V_^
NJM3-S6
MAINTENANCE
BUILDING
SAMPLE LOCATION MAP
(NOT TO SCALE)
PAVED
DRIVE
.NJM3-S6
LEGEND:
• SOIL SAMPLE
B SEDIMENT SAMPLE
A SURFACE WATER SAMPLE
IMUS
CORPaRATTOKI
A Halliburton Company
-------
.--tt:.
Tl
o
c
33
m
to
I
' ',' \ F::"
Vf.'".- / ^
-------
PVAc
TANK FARM
DIRT ROAD
ACCESS ROUTE
X PARKING LOCATION
(NOT TO SCALE)
FIGURE 2.2-10
_J CCDRPORATXDN
A Halliburton Company
-------
PVAC
TANK FARM
LEGEND:
• SOIL SAMPLE
WELL SAMPLE
SAMPLE LOCATION^ MAP
rjus
A Halliburton Company
FIGURE 2.2-11
-------
WELL c
TANK FA»M
PHOTO NUMBER AND
DIRECTION OF SIGHT
LOCATIONS
PHOTO LOCATION MAP
A Halliburton Company
FIGURE 2.2-12
-------
TANK FAWM
S-3\*' BORROW PIT
LAGOON B
LEGEND:
• SOIL SAMPLE LOCATIONS
LOCATIONS
SAMPLE LOCATION MAP
FIGURE 2.2-13
A HaHiburton Company
-------
E5.__»--^-H£?
• t- * -v - - ^-
d&uTiCs-^:
(QUAD) BELVIOERE, N.J.
SITE LOCATION MAP
3CALE: 1'»2000'
FIGURE 2.2-14
FIGURE 1
IMUS
CXDR=CDRATOSI
A Halliburton Company
-------
UNITED STATES
DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
TOPOGRAPHIC
MAP INFORMATION AND SYMBOLS
MARCH 1978
o
o
o
<
u
QUADRANGLE MAPS AND SERIES
Quadrangle maps cover four-sided areas bounded by parallels of latitude and meridians of longitude Quadrangle size is given in
minutes or degrees.
Vtap series are groups of maps that conform to established specifications for size, scale, content, and other elements
Map scale is the relationship between distance on a map and the corresponding distance on the ground.
Map scale is-expcessed as a numerical ratio and shown graphically by bar scales marked in feet, miles, and kilometers
NATIONAL TOPOGRAPHIC MAPS
Series
•:-mmute
"'-. * 1 5-minule
Puerto Rico "^-minute
5-mmute
Alaska 1 63.360
Intermediate
U S 1 :50.000
I S 1 1.000.000
Antarctica I 250 000
Antarctica 1 500.000
Scale
14.000
i 15.000
:o.ooo
6i 500
63 J60
100.000
:50.ooo
1.000.000
iso.ooo
1 500000
1 inch represents
:.000 feet
about 1.083 feet
about 1 667 feet
nearlv 1 mile
1 -niie
nearlv I 6 miles
nearlv 4 miles
neartv 16 miles
nearly 4 -niles
nearly 8 miles
i centimeter
represents
140 meters
-50 meters
200 meters
615 meters
nearlv 634 meters
! kilometer
I 5 kilometers
10 kilometers
15 kilometers
5 kilometers
Standard
quadrangle si«
' latirude-longtrudei
"^ * ~ i mm
Tli " 15 mm
'"ix ^ mm
:5x 15 mm
1 5X 10 to 36 mm
30*60 mm
1'* ? or ]•
4°*6"
l"x 3' to 15°
rx TV
Quadrangle
ire a
square -nuesi
49 to *n
98 to 140
•1
*- 'o is:
10" to 131
1 568 to 1140
4 580 to « 1*3
"i.~i* to o:. -59
4 089 to 1 336
13 I "4 to 30.462
CONTOUR LINES SHOW LAND SHAPES AND ELEVATION
The shape of the land, portrayed by contours, is the distinctive characteristic of topographic maps
Contours are imaginary lines following the ground surface at a constant elevation above or below sea level
Contour interval is the elevation difference represented by adjacent contour lines on maps.
Contour intervals depend on ground slope and map scale. Small contour intervals are used for flat areas; larger intervals are used
tor mountainous terrain.
Supplementary dotted contours, at less than the regular interval, are used in selected flat areas.
Index contours are heavier than others and most have elevation figures.
Relief shading, an overprint giving a three-dimensional impression, is used on selected maps
Orthopliotomaps. which depict terrain and other map features by color-enhanced photographic images, are available for
selected areas
COLORS DISTINGUISH KINDS OF MAP FEATURES
Black is used for manmade or cultural features, such as roads, buildings, names, and boundaries.
Blue is used tor water or hydrographic features, such as lakes, nvers. canals, glaciers, and swamps
Bruvvn is used tor relict or hypsographic features—land shapes portrayed by contour lines
Green is used tor woodland cover, with patterns to show scrub, vineyards, or orchards
Red emphasizes important roads and is used to show public land subdivision lines, land grants, and tern.e and field lines
Red tint indicates urban areas, in wnich only landmark buildings are shown.
Purple is used to show office revision from aenal photographs The changes are not field checked
INDEXES SHOW PUBLISHED TOPOGRAPHIC MAPS
Indexes For each State. Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands of the United States, Guam. American Samoa, and Antarctica
show available published maps. Index maps show quadrangle location, name, and survey date Listed also are special maps
jnd sheets, with prices. map dealers. Federal distribution centers, and map reference libraries, and instructions tor ordering
maps Indexes and a booklet describing topographic maps ore available free on request.
HOW MAPS CAN BE OBTAINED
Mail orders tor maps ot areas east of the Mississippi River, including Minnesota. Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands of the United
States, -inu Antarctica should be addressed to the Branch of Distribution. U. S Geological Survev. I 200 South Eads Sireet.
Arlington. Virginia 22202. Maps of areas west ot the Mississippi River, including Alaska. Hawaii. Louisiana. American
Samoa, anJ Guam should be ordered from the Branch ot Distribution. L . S Geological Survev Bo\ 25286. Federal Center.
Denver. Colorado "<0225 A single order combining both eastern and western maps may be placed with either office
Residents ot Alaska may order Alaska maps or an index, tor Alaska trom the Distribution Section. I S. Geological Survev.
Federal BuildinK-Box 12. 101 Twelfth Avenue, Fairbanks. Alaska *WOl. Order by map name. State, and series On an
order amounting tcr S300 or more at the list price, a 30-percent discount is allowed. No other discount is applicable
Prepayment is required and must accompanv each order Pavment may be made by money order or check payable to the
L' S Geological Sunev Your ZIP code is required.
Sales counters are maintajned m the following U S Geological Survev offices, where maps of the area may be purchased in
person: 1200 South Eads Street. Arlington. V a . Room 1028. General Services Administration Buildinz. 19th & F Streets
NW. Washington. D C . 1400 Independence Road. Rolla. Mo . 345 Middlefteld Road. Menlo Park. Calif.. Room 7638.
Federal Building. 300 North Los Angeles Street. Los Angeles. Calif . Room 504. Custom House. 555 Battery Street. San
Francisco. Calit . Building 41. Federal Center. Denver. Colo . Room 1012. Federal Building. I%1 Stout Street. Denver
Colo.. Room 1C45. Federal Building. I 100 Commerce Street. Dallas. Texas: Room S105. Federal Building, 125 South
State Street. Salt Lake Citv. Utah. Room IC402. National Center. 12201 Sunnse Vallev Drive. Resion, Va . Room 67S.
U. S. Court House. West 920 Riverside Avenue. Spokane. Wash.. Room 108. Skyline Building. 508 Second Avenue.
Anchorage. Alaska: and Federal Building. 101 Twelfth Avenue. Fairbanks. Alaska.
Commercial dealers sell U S. Geological Survev maps at their own prices. Names and addresses of dealers are listed in each
State index.
0
0
ui
O
OOS S9 t 31VDS J.OOJ
FIGURE 2.2-15
-------
TOPOGRAPHIC MAP SYMBOLS
,4RiA"CN5 vV'ut- S£ FOUND CN OLDER MAPS
i:;-;>r . gp^j -3ra sjr'ace
3-' :: - •, -cad ~3'd or -nnroved s^r'ace
: 3: • c -?r : ;• - 5 •. •,;: c ~ 3 ~•?~^ - • .-:AP
^a. - i-Aav d - J "g sf o 25 "eet :- ess
j3> ^ gn^3y : .-d'~g str z exceed ^g 25 'eet
Bo',nda'"?s National
5:ate
Court,. 3ansn T,unic
"C^'CC'3!ed t/. '' age '0<
= e;e',3! ;- Nat :^~a' jr S'a'
K>3":* ;3«e 5 ~g:e fac< anc ^u • O'e :-ac
^3 ':ac i:-ee- ar-d :a' .^e
5- :;e -zi- i"? '}• 'C3d
o^vnsn.Q or range
-------
. 3
-------
BACKGROUND DATA COLLECTION
AND PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
2.3.0 INTRODUCTION
Background file searches are performed and data are reviewed prior to any
planning of field work. Some of the information may have been summarized in a
preliminary assessment, however additional data gathering not reported in the PA
will probably be necessary.
2.3.1 PURPOSE
The collection of background data should be conducted keeping in mind that the
goal of this information search is to answer as much of the questions the HRS
model asks as possible, to identify the areas which require a sampling program or
site visit to complete, and to prepare a safety plan. It is necessary for the
persons doing the information search be familiar with the HRS model.
Of particular interest to the HRS are the potential targets which may be
adversely affected by the site. These include on-site workers, the general
public,flora and fauna and those which may have contact with contaminants via
air, surface water, or groundwater.
The purpose of a preliminary assessment is to provide the preliminary data and
evaluations required to determine what action to undertake next; e.g., no further
action, emergency action, or additional investigation. The objective of a
preliminary assessment is to characterize the site by examining the following
areas:
1. the hazardous substances present
2. pollutant dispersal pathways
3. types of receptors
4. facility management practices
5. potential responsible parties
The first four of these areas should be considered in order to properly assess the
hazard present at the site. The fifth area will be important should the state or
EPA attempt to recover from the responsible parties the costs incurred.
In addition to obtaining information for the hazard assessment of the site, and for
the development of work and sampling plans, information can be collected for the
completion of a safety plan. This includes the location of the nearest hospital,
fire-fighting facilities, local ambulance service, and police station. If unusual
hazards exist on site, these agencies may be contacted prior to field work to
prepare them for possible emergencies.
2.3.2 APPLICABILITY
Figure 2.4-1 illustrates the generic areas that must be assessed in order to
properly characterize the hazard associated with a potential hazardous waste site.
These are used in all stages of site characterization. However, since the
preliminary assessment occurs early in the process, it often identifies data gaps
and provides guidance for subsequent field work. The four areas of hazard
assessment are described below:
-------
FIGURE 2.4-1
Page 2 of 60
HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE
CHARACTERISTICS
o Hazard Potent 1*1
o Quant it iei
o Phyaical Character-
i«t ici
o Environmental
POTENTIAL
POLLUTANT DISPERSAL
PATHWAYS
o Geological
o llydrolofical
o Honitorin| Data
o Cllnatolo|ical
RECEPTOR
CHARACTERISTICS
o Receptor Identity
o Proximity
o Receptor Senaitivit;
o Epl demlological
SITK HAHACEMEHT
PRACTICES
o Security
o Containaient Prac-
ticea
o Treatment Prac-
tice*
o General Manage-
ment Quality
GENERIC AREAS OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE SITE ASSESSMENT
-------
BACKGROUND DATA COLLECTION
AND PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
Characterization of Hazardous Substances
Hazardous substance characterization is perhaps the most important component of the
assessment. The complete identification and quantification of all hazardous chemicals or
materials present at a site are rarely achievable. Nevertheless, it is important to try to
identify hazard characteristics such as human and environmental toxicity, flammability,
infectiousness, water solubility, volatility, soil-binding affinity, and persistence. In
general, substances of high hazard activity, long persistence, large quality, or high
migration potential tend to present high risks in uncontrolled situations.
Identification of Pollutant Dispersal Pathways
The identification of dispersal pathways involves an examination of the physical
environment of the site in order to identify routes of exposure to receptors. In addition,
it may involve a search for existing monitoring data that could support suspicion of
pollutant movement. Figure 2.4-2 illustrates some dispersal pathways. Geologic and
hydrologic site features are generally the most important. Porous geologic formations
promote subsurface migration, especially when coupled with ground water, which serves
as a transporting medium. Thus, soil and bedrock type and depth to ground water are
important to below-ground pollutant movements. Climatologic features such as rainfall
and prevailing wind direction affect surface dispersal by promoting water and wind
erosion of contaminated soil particles. In addition, rainwater can transport surface
pollutants vertically through soils to groundwater.
Identification of Receptors
Receptor identification involves determining whether any sectors of the public or
environment are subject to exposure to hazardous substances. Since water movement is a
major transporting mechanism, this effort commonly includes the identification of local
water resources threatened by toxic chemicals or other site hazards. In this way, the risk
of exposure of the local population is evaluated. Critical natural habitat areas such as
those occupied by endangered species should also be identified. In addition, land-use
patterns around the site should be identified. Food-producing areas such as farms, cattle
ranches, dairies, and recreational fishing and hunting areas could provide the link between
toxic contamination and human exposure.
Characterization of Site Management Practices
The characterization of site management practices at waste disposal facilities includes a
review of site security practices and specific disposal or containment procedures, such as
the use of impermeable liners, leachate collection systems, waste compatibility
assurance, and gas collection systems.
-------
FIGURE 2.4-2
of (,()
Aliborni
Pinicln
Deposition on Cfopi.
Indiucl Hum in fipoiuii
vii Ingiilion.
Bioiccumulilion in Cuiinj
Gimi tnd Agriculluril
Ouicl
Humin ind (nviiorvninlil
vii Dirmil
Conlicl ind Inhililion
ol Piniclti u Git
fiih Sunmi
Bioictunwlitlon.
Hum in Eipoiuii *ii
Fuk mil Sidifliinl Conlicl
a O'uicl Utt ol Will/
Surlici fronon ol
Conliminilid
Soil Pirtitlii
Oownwild Migdlion
in Soil Moiiiuri
Aquifer Coniiminilion
HaiBfdous-Wajte Dispersal Pathways
-------
BACKGROUND DATA COLLECTION
AND PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
2.3.3 DISCUSSION
The information that is obtained from a preliminary assessment undergoes an
interdisciplinary evaluation and results in a qualitative estimate of the hazard
potential at the site. It is useful to keep in mind the EPA Hazard Ranking
System when determining the hazard posed by an individual site. The Hazard
Ranking System (HRS) is the EPA authorized system for ranking hazardous waste
sites. It is used as a means for applying uniform technical judgement regarding
the potential hazards presented by a site relative to other sites. The HRS will be
discussed in greater depths later in this course.
2.3.* PROCEDURE
Compilation of a background file begins with the collection and review of
pertinent data regarding the site. The review of pertinent information serves to
establish the specific site inspection needs and identify missing elements be
determined at the site.
Examples of the type of information sought are described in Table 2.
Data sources most frequently used for preliminary assessments are provided in
Tables 3 through 6. These lists represent starting points; they should not be
considered complete lists of all sources available. Additional data sources follow
these lists.
In practice, it would be unusual if even half of these sources were checked during
a preliminary assessment. However, it is important to note that these
information sources exist. Many will have to be checked in order to complete the
site inspection that will ordinarily follow the preliminary assessment.
Detailed references should be maintained for all sources used, whether texts,
journals, maps or personal communications. (See Figure 2.^-3.)
-------
SUBJICT
BACKGROUND DATA COLLECTION
AND PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
NUMBKR
RIVI8IOM
6 of 60
•FFtCTIVl DAT!
TABLE 2
INFORMATION NEEDED
o The identity of the site owner
or owners
o Right of access information
o The types, quantities, and disposal
methods of hazardous waste present
o Accessibility to potential sampling
sites
o The local topography and drainage
patterns
o The local hydrogeology
o The location of any nearby or onsite
potable or monitoring wells
o Records of public complaints regarding
problems associated with the site or
drinking water
o Past regulatory action at the site
o Locations and numbers of the nearest
hospital and fire department
-------
SUBJECT
BACKGROUND DATA COLLECTION
AND PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
NUMIEff
RrvtaioM
'*<» 3 or 60
emcTive OATI
TABLE 3
Sources of Information for Characterization of Hazardous Substances
Review management records
a. Waste inventories
b. Storage inventories
c. Shipment manifests
d. Permits
Search for Waste Generator Records
Interview
a. Site Personnel
b. Neighbors
c. Government Inspectors
Review Official Agency Files
a. Permit Application
b. Site Inspection Reports
c. Sampling or Monitoring data
Consult Toxicology and Hazardous Substances References
a. Chemical Hazard Response Information System
b. Hamilton and Hardy, Industrial Toxicology
c. Sax, Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials
d. Patty, Industial Hygiene and Toxicology
e. ACGIG, Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and
Physical Agents in the Workroom Environment.
f. Miedl, Hazardous Materials Handbook
g. Hauley, Condensed Chemical Dictionary
h. The Merck Index
i. CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics
j. NFPA Hazardous Materials Manual
Consult Industrial Processes References
Professional Organizations
a. American Chemical Society
b. American Institute of Chemical Engineers
-------
BACKGROUND DATA COLLECTION
AND PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
TABLE
Sources of Information for Identification of
Pollutant Disposal Pathways
1. Geological and Soil Data
a. USGS Topographic Maps (Identifies surface drainage features)
b. Other USGA Publications (Geological and water resources)
c. State Geological Survey Offices
d. USDA Soil Conservation Service Publications and Soil Surveys
e. Drillers' Logs
2. Hydrology
a. USGS Water Resources Reports
b. USGS Stream Flow Records
3. Climatological Data
a. National Climatic Data Center (Ashville, N.C.)
b. Meteorology Departments of Local Universities
'4. Local Health Departments
-------
SUBJECT
BACKGROUND DATA COLLECTION
AND PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
NUMBER
REVISION
PAOC 10 Qf 60
EFFECTIVE DATE
TABLE 5
Sources of Information for Receptor Characterization
1. Maps and Aerial Photographs
a. USGS
b. State Department of Transportation
c. Local Planning Groups
d. Utility Companies (right-of-way maps)
e. County Road Commissions
f. County Soil Surveys - USDA
g. Aerial Survey companies
2. Local Water Departments
3. US Public Health Service Files and Publications
*. County Agricultural Extension Offices
5. Federal and State Fish and Wildlife Departments
6. Local Universities
7. Local Naturalists or Environmental Groups
a. American Littoral Society
b. Audoban Society
8. Medical Reports
9. Local Newspapers
10. Local Weil Drillers
11. GEMS Population and Housing Data Retrieval System (available through US EPA
only)
-------
SUBJECT
BACKGROUND DATA COLLECTION
AND PRELIMINARY ASSESSMENT
NUMBER
REVISION
PA« 11 OF 60
EFFECTIVE DATE
TABLE 6
Sources of Information for Site Management Practices
1. Site Records
2. Personal Interviews with Site Workers
3. Federal, State and Local Regulatory Agency Files
(Routine Inspections or Compliance Violations).
4. Aerial Photographs
5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) Files and National Institute of Occupational
Safety and Health (NIOSH) Files
6. Fire Departments
-------
Page 13 of 60
DRAFT
GRAPHICAL EXPOSURE MODELING SYSTEM
(GEMS)
USER'S GUIDE
Prepared for:
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
OFFICE OF PESTICIDES AND TOXIC SUBSTANCES
EXPOSURE EVALUATION DIVISION
Task No.4
Contract No. 68016618
^William Wood - Project Officer
Hall - Task Manager
Prepared by:
GENERAL SOFTWARE CORPORATION
8401 Corporate Drive
Landover, Maryland 20785
Sutmitted: June 25, 1984
-------
Page 15 of 60
MASTER AREA REFHTOCZ FILE (MART) OP THE 198i CBGOS
Sourea
The Master Area Reference File (MARF) is a proprietary product of
Donnelly Marketing, Inc., a subsidiary of Dunn and Bradstreet, and is
available only to EPA users and to contractors engaged in EPA projects.
Description
The complete corrected MAW of the 1980 Census, with geographic
coordinates for small geographic areas, is installed for GEMS on a
separate disk pack. It consists of four subfiles, one for each major
census geographic region, and is available to users when that disk pack is
mounted. The file has a variety of location identification information,
including region, state, county, place, census tracts and enumeration
districts or block groups (See Figure C-l for illustrations). It also
contains population count by race, the number of occupied and owner-
occupied housing units, group quarters, and number of families for all the
enumeration districts/block groups for the continental United States,
Hawaii, and Alaska.
CEDPOP, a subset of the MARF of the 1980 Census, is accessible
through GEMS. In addition to total population and household counts, the
file includes geographic coordinates for the population-weighted centre id
of each census block group or enumeration district (BG/ED) in the file.
Use
The complete MARF 80 Census file, installed in GEMS on a separate
disk, is expected to be used heavily by GEMS users to identify household
and population by racial groups at any required geographic level. County
aggregate populations have already been created from this file.
CEDPOP was interfaced with ATM80 in GEMS to provide estimates of
population sizes exposed to concentrations of airborne chemicals around a
release site and with BOXMOD80 to provide population estimates within area
source regions. The population centroids are identified, and populations
are accumulated in sectors (typically the sixteen wind direction sectors)
surrounding the center point within a user-specified number of radial
distances out from the center.
The CEDPOP• file also is accessed by CENSUS DATA and RADII-5
procedures under the GICDATA HANDLING operation in GEMS. CENSUS DATA
accumulates population and housing counts by up to ten user-specified
radial distances and from one-to-sixteen sectors. The PADII-5 program
tabulates the same information 'except housing counts) and displays the
cancroid locations for -isar-specified circular distances around a canter
DO inc.
-------
GAGE
IFDDIR
IFDIND
Master Area Reference File
(MARF) 1980 census
parameters: agriculture, climate,
vegetation, forestry, air quality,
land, natural areas, population,
water ojiality, terrain (soils) and
wildlife.
Th« GAGE dataset contains primarily
stream flow rates monitored
consistently by approximately 99,500
stream gaging stations throughout the
country, and some estimated flows.
IFDDIR contains industrial facility
data for approximately 28,000 direct
dischargers excluding publicly owned
treatment works
HD31C contains limited industrial
facility data for approximately
12,000 indirect dischargers which
discharge through other facilities,
usually POTWs.
This dataset contains a variety of
location identification information,
population count by race, the number
of occupied and owner-occupied
TABLE 2-2. GEMS Datasets (Continued)
DATASET NAME
DESCRIPTION
Meteorological Data
Publicly Owned Treatment Works
(POTWs)
number of families for all the
enumeration district/block groups for
continental USA, Hawaii, and Alaska.
Several meteorological data files are
contained in this category: (1) the
Stability Tabular Array (STAR) data
file has meteorological data for 334
first order weather stations in the
continental USA, (2) A master index
file (STARSEL), and (3) An auxiliary
file (AUX).
This dataset contains 1982 survey
data on the unit treatment process,
the influent and effluent and hour
rates, and the population served by
33,000 publicly owned treatment works
around the country.
-------
o
I
en
SMS A
Urbanized
Araa
Central City
Census
Tract
Blockt
Group
Block
Inside Urbanized Area
The entire SMSA la subdivided into cenaua tracts.
blocks and block groups do not have symbolized boundaries
ae do the other ^reaa, but are identified by number.
County
Hlnor Civil
Dlvltloo
• T\
DUtclct
'. Mace Over 10.000 Population
n
I
Place Under 10.000
Population
EnuaeratIon
District
Block • .
Numbering
Area
Hock
Outside Urbanized Area
•lock*
Figure C-l. Geographic Hierarchy Inside and Outside Urbanized Areas (UA's)
13
(a
OQ
ON
O
-------
I I-IG V.'i stv.ooil Houli.
••i
I \
'******_*'*' *•*' '*'
\
//////// / 7 I L
'fl-—/-
/ / / /
/ / / r
\ \ \ \
\ \ \ \ \ \
\ \ y \ v
XXX//////
\ \ \ \ \ \ \
V A \ V
/L7T
\ \ \ \
//////// n
\\\\N
''////////11 \
CATALOG OF
U.S. GOVERNMENT
AND R&D DOCUMENTS
ON MICROFICHE
Page 17 of 60
-------
Page IS of 60
Aerial photographs have become an invaluable tool
for all those interested in studying the surface of
Earth: scientists, engineers. land-use planners.
environmentalists, cartographers, and many others.
The great boom in aerial photography in the past
few decades has produced millions of photographs
of the United Slates. These range from high-
alcitude pictures of large areas to low-level photos
showing smaller section! with greater detail such as
cities, towns, and rural areas. Almost all of this
vast store of aerial photographs is readily available
for purchase: the price per print depends on its size
and type.
Aerial photography records maintained by the
U.S. Geological Survey (USCS) go back many
years, is early as the late 1930's for certain areas.
Most early photographs on record were taken on
black-and-white film. Later the use of color and
color-infrared film was introduced.
Photos are available from low-altitude flights—
often below 10.000 feet. These photos show detail of
towns, streets, houses, and even backyards. Other
photos were taken at high altitudes, some as hieh as
60.000 feet or more. These show less detail but cover
a large area. If you ire interested in photographs
How To Order
Aerial Photographs
U.S. Department of tfia Interior
Geological Survey
National Cartographic
Information Center (NCIC)
.
V.V ^i^_ '---'-> *- -'"1 "
Htqn-UMua* color-infrared cxxno, 1.65.500-
Higti-aimud* cdot photo. l:32.75O-scal«
.\
"^'-1 r"J^ taken from the very highesc altitudes available ask tr
--,./.;.- j ,-U.S. Geological Survey for information on satellite
,', ,!;. ~ . ] images.
' ',: ' '• People want aenal photos for different reasons
, •-••- ." Some want them tor decorative purposes, such a^ .
• ij, ' framed photo on the wall or under ;he class cop o;
i;'. ~" a table. Others might warn to examine some :err^:
feature, or to determine whether rains ha\c erovii-
a panicular hillside. Still others micht 'Aani older
aenal photos to study changes in the locale o\er tr
years. The National Cartographic Information Cen..
(NCIC). which is pan of the U'.S. GeoIo^icaJ Sun^
National Mapping PrOCTum. can prmide >ou with
assistance in finding the nght aerial photosrapn.
How To Identify the Right Area
Before you order >our aenal photos, you must
identity the area that you want >hown in the phi1'
If you can send NCIC the geographic coordinate
(longitude and latitude! of the area that sou are
interested in. we will be able to research your
request immediately
-------
we strongly recommend circling or pinpointing the
area on a USGS topographic map. If you do not
have a map. you can obtain a State index to
topographic maps from NCIC. The index will tell
you how to purchase the correct map from the
Geological Survey.
If you are not able to use a L'SGS map. you can
use a State or local highway map. or some other
suitable map. to indicate the area that you want
shown on the photograph. Or you can make a
sketch. The more specific you can be in
pinpointing the area, the better. Indicate whether a
specific feature, such as a lajce. landmark, house.
or crossroads should appear in the photo.
Enlargements
The standard print size of an aerial photo sold by
NCIC is 9" x 9".
Excellent results can be obtained by enlarging
these prints. Details that are barely perceptible in
smaller prints become readily visible in the
enlargements. For example, at a scale of 1:24.000,
i mm UN me pnoiograpn ucpinb i.uuu teet on me
ground; at 4X enlargement. 1 inch equals 500 feet.
Enlargements are available in the following
sizes:
2X (18 x 18 inches)
3X (27 x 27 inches)
4X (36 x 36 inches)
Prices range from S3 to $100 depending on size
and on whether the photographs you order are
black-and-white or color.
How To Order Aerial Photographs
If you know exactly what photograph you want,
you can order directly from NCIC or the
Geological Survey's EROS Data Center. Mark
your map or sketch with the precise area desired in
the coverage, fill out the checklist below and the
appropriate enclosed pricelist/order form, and make
out a check or money order for the exact amount
(prepayment required) to the U.S. Geological
Survey. Send these with your name, address.
organizational attiliation. and telephone J
National Cartographic Information Cenil
U.S. Geological Survey
507 National Center
Reston, Virginia 22092
Telephone: 703/860-6045
or
U.S. Geological Survey
EROS Data Center
User Services Section
Sioux Falls. South Dakota 57198
Telephone: 605(594-6511
or contact the followina office:
Aerial Photograph Ordering Checklist
If you do not have a precise idea of what you
want, please fill out the checklist below as best
you can and send it *ith your marked map or
sketch to NCIC A researcher will be assigned to
your inquiry and will advise you on the
photographs available and the cost.
Please include your davtime or work telephone
number in all correspondence so that you can be
contacted if necessarv
Name:
Street address:
City and State .
ZIP:
Telephone: ires): _
(work): _
Company affiliation
Soec;f:c Area.
State.
Town'
County
Ma'*ea map encloses CH
Section, 'ownsnip. and range (if known)'
Geographic coo-Cir.ates:
Sketch enclosed D
Feature that you specifically wanl to see'
Black-and-white' ; '•
Color-infrared. LJ
Color LJ
No preference Cj
Date of Photography
Year:
Time of year, if you have a specific requirement'
Spring: LJ Fall: • _
Summer: LJ Winter: L3
Oldest availaole: O Most recent avaiiacie: Jl
No preference' CH
Level of Desired Ground Detail'
Lew altitude, large scale — Maximum detail: CD
High altitude. small scale — Minimum eetaii _
Size: (not available for all aeral pr.ciocaprs'
Standard ccrr=c: 9 9 LT
3X 1 27" - 27') H
2X(1S' < :35 .
4X ,26 36 >
Stereoscooic:
Do \ou wanl a series of overlapping cnotos for viewing throucn a ste",
Yes D No. D I
Purpose.
We can advise you c" 'he best selection avaiiacie if ycu ces:-ce »r.
intenc to use tre photograons tor:
-c-
Page 19 of 60 _
-------
Now Available. . .
LAND USE AND
LAND COVER AND
ASSOCIATED MAPS
In the Geological Survey Open File
The Geological Survey is now compiling land use and land cover and
associated maps for the entire United States. These maps will help satisfy
a longstanding need for a consistent level of detail, standardization of
categories, and consistent use of scales of compilation for a type of data
used by government land-use planners, land managers, and resource-
management planners. Once the bench-mark series of maps is completed,
updating of the maps will provide a much-needed tool for analyzing trends,
problems in local and regional areas throughout the entire United States,
and changes in land use patterns.
The land use and land cover maps are compiled using a classification
system that has i framework of 9 general Level I categories that are
further subdivided into 37 more specific Level II categories.
The classification system, as developed with the assistance of a com-
mittee of representatives from the Geological Survey, the National Aero-
nautics and Space Administration, the Soil Conservation Service, the
Association of American Geographers, and the International Geographical
Union, can be used with data from conventional sources and from remote
sensors on high-altitude aircraft and satellites. The system and the cate-
gories are explained in Geological Survey Professional Paper 964, available
from the Survey (see order forml.
A minimum mapping unit of 10 acres (4 hectares), is used for all urban
areas and bodies of surface water. It is also used for mapping surface
mines, quarries, and gravel pits, and in certain agricultural areas. A
minimum mapping unit of 40 acres US hectares) is used for all other
categories.
Aerial photographs and other remotely sensed data serve as the primary
sources used in compiling the land use and land cover maps. Secondary
sources include earlier land use maps and other maps prepared by (laid-
survey methods. The secondary source maps are generally available at
larger scales and for small areas such as parts of metropolitan rejicns.
After compilation, the Survey's land use and land cover maps are checked
carefully for accuracy.
ASSOCIATED MAPS
Sets of ':ur associated naps are prepared at the same scale as the
land use ana land cover maps in order to relate the land use and land cover
m:DS to other data. For example, land use data cjn be combined with the
SGCioEconomic data compiled by the Bureau of the Census or can be
ccrr.oarcd to nydrologic data compiled lor hydrologic units. These associated
m:ps are:
:.i;,P CHARACTERISTICS
PC'JT::;i u::iTS
^"c;i2G;C UlilTS
Ct'.S'.C CC'J'iTY
S'jZ3l'il$!Gi'IS
Depicts ccunty c.-d Siats bourdzrus as
sh:.vn on U.S. Geological Survey ta;o
maps.
Delineates hydrclagic units, as est:2lisr,3d
by the Water Ss::urc:s Council :nd p-i-
listed :y tr.e S.;,:/s V/at:r R3jc':r::s
Division on 1 :!5.CCC so:!: S!:te rr.:".
Shows rr:r:r ci'.il ii.isirns or erjiv::;rt
areas. Ce-c'-i tracts a!:-a r3 $!•; n
Ddlin:;::s s'jr:c; :.sn;r:r.;: ;: : rr.ir.i7.;:.-
m::;i.->5 :-. ! s.:3 of -',0 :c:;s ''.w ;-.::•
t:-:; ;:r l:-:s :.!,-i-::-?rjd ':/ Fc::r:l
:;s::!:s. S-:::n::: o'.vr.er;h:; r;;its
are not ;r:..n.
£.',:: MAPS A;:O ::.:.? SCALES
1 3 '.-: .;: :rd ':-J c:v:r and ;$sc:i:::: ~::s :;» i-;-?::!;! '::;:;
: :" ;' - --;-' ~;:: :l "'- L1 S G::l;;i::i i.r,:, :t sc:ics 01 1 1;0,.:0
,1 ncn on i-,; rap r;pre:::.!; ::cut ; miUs on ;h« ground) or 1 i:a.::o
Page 20 of 60
MOO.OOO-scale planimetric base maps become available, more land use
and land cover and associated maps will be prepared at that scale.
STATUS OF AVAILABLE MAPS
The land use and land cover and associated maps currently available
are shown in the "Indei to Land Use and Land Cover and Associated Maps"
published by the U.S. Geological Survey (see order form).
ORDERING MAPS
Master sets of the land use and land cover and associated maps for a
particular area are on open file and ire available for reproduction at the
U.S. Geological Survey National Cartographic Information Center unit that
has responsibility for that area, as shown on the map below.
Copies of land use and land cover and associated maps are available
on the following types of material to permit a wide range of graphic inter-
pretation and application:
(1) Stable base film positive, clear or matte.
(21 Semi-stable diazo foil, matte.
13) Paper diazo.
Copies of the maps may be purchased from:
Eastern National Cartographic Mid-Continent National Cartographic
Information Center
U.S. Geological Survey
S36 National Center
Reston. VA 22092
Telephone: (703) 860-6338
FTS 928-6338
Rocky Mountain National
Cartographic Information
Center
U.S. Geological Survey
Box 25046, Stop 510
Federal Center, Building 25
Denver, CO 80225
Telephone: (303) 234-4879
FTS 234-2326
Information Center
U.S. Geological Survey
1400 Independence Road
Rolla. MO 63401
Telephone: (314) 364-3630
FTS 276-91 07
Western National Cartographic
Information Center
U.S. Geological Survey
345 Middlefield Road
Menlo Park, CA 94025
Telephone: (415) 323-8111
'ext241D
FTS 467-2427
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Technical information about land use and land cover and associated
maps may be obtained from:
U.S. Geological Survey
Geography Program
Land Information and Analysis Office
710 National Center
Reston, VA 22092
Telephone: (703) 860-625S
FTS 928-6256
AREAS OF RESPONSIBILITY FOH U^ilTS OF THE !IAT;::iAL
CARTOGRAPHIC INFORMATION CENTER
-------
Page 21 of 60
Order Form
\: = il order form to: U.S. Geological Survey, Branch of Distribution, 12CO South Eads Street, Arlington, VA 22202
Enclosed (find) $ (check or money order payable to U.S. Geological Survey).
P'esse send copies of USGS Professional Paper 964 at $0.75 per copy (postpaid) to:
sena
_ copies of "Index to Land Use and Land Cover and Associated Maps" (free) to:
Name
Street Address
City and State ZIP Code
U.S. Geological Survey
Branch of Distribution
1200 South Eads Street
Arlington, VA 22202
Cr;::al Business
Penalty fcr Private Use, S300
Postage and Fees Paid
U.S. Department of the Interior
INT-413
/Yovv Available,..
USE AMD
AK1D
!n the G:-c!cncal Survey Opan File
,'oo/c far Land
2nd Oihsr Resource Planning
and '.'s
LAMO USE Af>0 LAND COVER
POLITICAL 'JN.TS
HYIROLOG'C U'ilTS
CZ'.'SUS COUNTY SU3CIVIS:Oi,5
EDERAL LAND
..-, N e - i -i. r
-------
Page 22 of 60
This form is used to request a geographic search for Aircraft data over a point or area
of interest. Aircraft coverage is not available for areas outside of the United States.
Data from this inquiry form will be used to initiate a computer Geosearch. The results
will be returned on a computer listing along with a decoding sheet, from which
photography can be selected and ordered.
Complete the form as follows:
A. Enter your NAME, ADDRESS, and ZIP CODE clearly. Enter a PHONE number where
you can be reached during business hours.
B. Complete the required information for either the POINT SEARCH or AREA
RECTANGLE inquiry, which includes the geographic LATITUDE and LONGITUDE coor-
dinates. If coordinates are not available, please supply the GEOGRAPHIC NAME AND
LOCATION or a map with the area of interest identified. Minimizing your area of in-
terest will allow for a faster and more critical retrieval of information.
C. Complete all other information.
D. Complete the COMMENTS portion of the inquiry. Will it be used for interpretation,
analysis, or will it be framed and placed on a wall? This information will assist our
technicians in determining whether the products available will satisfy your
requirements.
E. Return the completed form to the EROS DATA CENTER.
FORMATION OR ASSISTANCE VIAY ALSO BE OBTAINED FROM THE FOLLOWING U.S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY. NATIONAL CARTOGRAPHIC
INFORMATION CENTER OFFICES
a;;c.-.ci Center
.-.ci Ce
j5:cn. VA 22C32
Ti - ^ : 6 ; 2 3
;T-I 703 £60-6323
Vid Continent '.'3'jping
Center
14CO Independence Road
Ro''a, MO 65-101
FTS, 277-OS51
Comm: 31 4, 3-11 -OSS 1
Rockv Mountain Mapamg
Cem^r
Stop 504, Denver F-^c^ral Western Mapping Center
Center 345 MicL^iieid ROJG
Denver CO 80225 Vonlo Park CA 34QZ5
FTS 234-232S FTS ^67-2426
Ccnm 3C3 23-V-2325 Comm: a 1 5. 323-3 1 1 1
National Scace Tecrn r :•:;>
laboraton-js
NSTL Station, MS 3r529
FTS -194-35-11
Comm- 601 688-3544
-------
Page 23 of 60
RETURN COMPLETED FORM TO: ^sc
User S«rvic« S.ction Commr 605/594-6151 TWX- ai n KBS mm
Sioux Falls. SO 57198 FTS: 784-7151 * ™/X. 910-668-0310
DATE.
NAME.
ADDRESS.
COMPANY.
. CITY/STATE.
.ZIP.
PHONE (HOME).
.(BUSINESS).
-EROS ACCOUNT N0._
_REF. NO..
POINT SEARCH
lm»q«r» <*>rh inv CQ«*r«q« ov«r
AREA RECTA*G,t
1 AT
LONG. LONG.
i-niq«rv with anv co»*nq« within
I
POINT NO. 1
I AT * ' .,
LONG * ' ^
AREA MO. 1
1 AT * ' »
LONG. * ' ft TCI
POINT NO. 2
IAT • ' _
lONO * ' ui
AREA NO. *
POINT NO. 3
AREA NO 3
' ,
U '
• V* -cj
(1
, nfcjrt • _ -V TO i
If my of th« «OQV« gtograoFuc r*f«rvfK*« cannot &• crovtdtd. pMo*
i by GEOGRAPHIC NAME AND LOCATION lincHidt • TI»O if ooitib'
J?GE
[5 000-2S 0001
a
3LAC* t AHITE
PSEFEBflEO SCALE
a
MEDIUM
'25 000-30,0001
PREFERRED FORMAT
a
COLOR
a
SMALL
60.000-GHEATEHI
a
COLOR t.NFBAREO
•«EFSR«EO TIME OF
[j ALL COVERAGE
Q LATcST COVERAGE
Q SPE: PIC DATES __
MINIMUM QUALITY RATING •
a a G
POOR)
f"I '
NOTE:
Classification of percent of cioud ccver is subiecTive
and is relative to the amount of ciouds appearing or.
the imagery and not on their location,
FOR INFORMATION OR ASSIS7A(\CE PLEASE CONTACT
U S. GEOLOGICAL SUnVEY, EROS DATA CENTER
SIOUX FALLS, SO 57198
COMM: 605/59'i-6151 -FTS. 784-7151
C o m m 2 n t s'
-------
Page 26 ot bu
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR
GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
SPECIAL MAPS AS FOLLOWS (continued) PRICE
rteridmK*r» 2.00
Golf Hammock 2.00
UJuGtorg* 2.00
Lake OkMcholw* 2.00
Lake Seminol* 2.00
Okefenok** Swunp 2,00
Penaaeola Bar 2.00
3anibl* Island 2.00
The Everglade* 2.00
G«ortia. Color Moaale O.2S
Hartford; Color Photomap 3.2S
N«w Jvwr, Color Howk 2.00
Upp«r Chcaapuk* Bay, Color Im*g« (1:250,000) 3.25
Uppw ChoapMlu Bar, Color Imag* (1:900.000) 2.50
Vataajoknll. Inland. Color Imag* (falD 2.00
VatnajokulL Inland, Black * Whit* Imag* (winter) 2.00
MAPS, BY SERIES NAMKQB SCALE PRICE
Standard Topographi* »«dr«ig0fett.00* 138.000; ka.SOO)* tt.00
Orthophotomap*
Orthophotoquad*
1:50.000 Topographic Quadrangle* (DMA)
1:25,000 (7H' z 16') Metric Topographic Qoadrangi*
1:100,000 Map* (Including BLM Sorfac*/Mineral Mngt.)
1:125.000 Map*
1:260,000 Map* (Including Antarctic A Alaaka Boundary S*h**>
County Map* (1:60,000 * U100,000)
SUM BaM (No Contour*—1:600,000 * 1:1.000,000)
Stat* BaM (Topographic * R»U«f—1:500,000)
International Map* of th* World (1:1.000,000)
National Park Map*
Coastal Ecological Inventory Map*
National Atlas Separates
Map* 2-A A 2-B
Map3-A
M*p3-B
Map* 5-A; 5-B; 5-C; 5-D
Map6-A
Map* T-A; 7-B; 7-C
10-A
11-A
Map 18-A
NOTE:
'Includes New Map*. Revision* (Standard and Interim)
and Reprint*
SPECIAL MAPS AS FOLLOWS
Regional Maps:
Adirondack Region (NY) 3.25
Appalachian Region 2.50
Greater Atlanta Region (GA) 3.25
Greater Atlanta Region Slop* (GA) 3.25
Greater Pittsburgh Region iPA) 3.25
Antarctica:
Ellsworth Mountains, Blue-tone Mosaic 3.25
McMurdo Sound Region, Black and Whit* Image 2.50
McMurdo Sound Region. Black and White [mage 2.00
McMurdo Sound Region. Blue-tone [mage 3.25
Victoria Land Coaat, Blue-tone Mosaic 3.25
Chesapeake Bay and Vicinity Winter, Color Mosaic 3.25
Florida. Color Mosaic 5.00
Florida, Color Image:
Apaiachee Bay 2.00
Charlotte Harbor 2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
3.25
3.2S
3.2S
3.25
3.25
2.50
3.25
3.2S
3.2S
3.28
2.50
5.00
2. SO
3.25
2.00
3.25
2.00
2.50
1.00
.50
THEMATIC MAPS
Baa*m*nt Rock Map of North America
Baaement Rock Map of U.S.
Bougacr GraTity Anomaly Map of the U.3.
Coal Field* of Alaaka
Coal Field* of the U.S.
Geologic Map of North America
Geologic Map of (State)
Geologic Map of the U.S.
Hydrologic Unit Map of (State)
Tectonic Map of North America
World Seunucity Map
1.25
(set) 5.00
1.50
3.00
3.50
(set) 3.00
(for 1st sheet) 8.00
(p*r add. sheet) 4.00
(set) 8.00
from 2.00 to 8.00
'•«t> 8.00
2.50
Prices for other "Hiematic Maps varies. P!ea<* check with your Dis-
tribution Center or Public Inquinee Office for individual map pnc».
A's Antarctic Geologic Mape
C's Coal Investigations
GPs Geophysical Investigation*
GQ'j Geologic Quadrangles
HA's Hdrologic Investigations
1's Miscellaneous Investigations
L's Land Use/Land Cover Series
MF's Miscellaneous Field Studies
MR's Mineral Investigations Resource
OC's Oil & Ga* Investigations Charts
OM's Oil & Gaa Investigation* Map*
-------
Page 27 of 60
United States Metropolitan Areas
Aerial color photographs of metropolitan areas within the United States are available from the EROS Data
Center. Photographs have been chosen which are of high quality and have a minimum of cloud cover. The
scale of the selected photographs ranges from about 1:60,000 (1 inch a 1 mile) to 1:125,000 (1 inch = 2
miles). The majority of the preselected photographs are color infrared: others are natural color.
Please note that most large urban areas encompass more land area than can be covered by a single
photograph, and that the majority of the photographs available indude the central business districts. If
other portions of the city are desired, describe the area of interest on the Geographic Computer Search in-
quiry form, or contact us about your requirements by letter, telephone, or personal visit.
Aerial color photography is available over these metropolitan areas:
Akron. OH
Albany, NY
Albuquerque, NM
Anaheim. CA
Anchorage, AK
Atlanta, GA
Baltimore. MO
Baton Rouge. LA
Beaumont. TX
Bethlehem. PA
Billings, MT
Birmingham. AL
Boston. MA
Bridgeport. CT
Buffalo, NY
Canton. OH
Charleston, SC
Chattanooga, TN
Cheyenne, WY
Chicago,IL
Cincinnati, OH
Cleveland. OH
Columbus, OH
Dallas. TX
Davenport, LA
Denver, CO
Detroit. MI
El Paso, TX
Fargo, ND
Hint. MI
Ft. Lauderdale, FL
Ft. Wayne, IN
Ft. Worth. TX
Fresno, CA
Gary, IN
Grand Rapids, MI
Greensboro, NC
Greenville, SC
Harrisburg, PA
Hartford, CT
Honolulu, HI
Houston. TX
Huntington. WV
Indianapolis. IN
Jersey City. NJ
Kansas City, MO
Knoxville. TN
Lansing, MI
Las Vegas. NV
Lincoln. NE
Long Branch, NJ
Long Island. NY
(Queens-Nassau County)
Los Angeles. CA
Louisville, KY
Memphis, TN
Miami, FL
Milwaukee, Wl
Minneapolis, MN
Mobile, AL
Nashville, TN
New Brunswick, NJ
New Haven, CT
New Orleans, LA
New York City, NY
Newark, NJ
Norfolk, VA
Oklahoma Cry, OK
Omaha. NE
Orlando, FL
Oxnard, CA
Patterson. NJ
Peoria. IL
Philadelphia. PA
Phoenix AZ
Pittsburgh. PA
Pocatello. ID
Portland, OR
Providence. Rl
Raleigh/Durham, NC
Richmond, VA
Rochester. NY
Sacramento, CA
St. Louis. MO
St. Paul, MN
St. Petersburg, FL
Salt Lake City, UT
San Antonio, TX
San Bemadino. CA
San Diego. CA
San Francisco, CA
San Jose, CA
Scranton, PA
Seattle, WA
Shreveport. LA
Sioux Falls. SD
Springfield, MA
Syracuse, NY
Tacoma, WA
Tampa. FL
Toledo. OH
Tucson, AZ
Tulsa. OK
Utica/Rome. NY
Washington. DC
West Palm Beach, PL
Wichita, KS
Wilmington. DE
Worcester, MA
(US0018 June
Survev £S
~ter. Jou« :j
-------
Distinction between M.ip Scales*
ic Ser ies :
1:24.Olio-Scale (1 Inch > 2,000 feetj
Area Shown = 1 square mile
These maps cover approximately 57 square
miles and are used where detailed land
surface Information Is required. They ire
used for energy and ulneril exploration,
for natural resource and water Management.
for agricultural and census area statis-
tics, for outdoor recreation activities,
and for many engineering studies and
surveys. ApproMlnwtely 54.000 maps are
^ required to cover the conterminous U.S.
1:100,000-Srale (I inch • I.Smiles)
Area Shown z 16 square nlles
fiich of these maps cover an area equal to
3? of Ihr I:24.0UO-scale maps from which
the content is derived. These naps are
used for count/wide or broad area studies
where less extensive detail is required.
They are used as a null I-purpose base for
displaying various Information, such as,
Important farmlands, wetlands. Federal
land ownership and subsurface Mineral
rights, and for State and county Manage-
ment planning. Appro*. I.BOO naps arc
required to cover the conterninous U.S.
I.200.000-Srale (I Inch • 4 nlles)
Area Shown • 107 square nlles
fach of these naps covers an area equal to
\2H of the l:24,000-scale naps and conn In
significantly less detail. These naps are
used for broader area or regional planning.
They are used for water resource studies,
for civil defense and disaster relief
coordination, and as bases for air pollu-
tinn, aeronautical charts, land-use, and
weather records. Appro*. 450 naps are
required to cover the conterminous U.S.
1:500.1100 Siale (I inch • 8 nlles)
Area Shown B 415 square nlles
These maps generally cover a State and are
used to display studies. Inventories and
management activities requiring detail
appropriate to * statewide overview. They
are also used to help In locating inter-
state utilities, to delineate drainage
basin boundaries and as a base to prepare
State Highway and other naps They are
avaiUMe as a planlmetric. topographic.
nr stu
Ot)
ft
Ix)
CO
o\
O
-------
Page 29 of 60
NATIONAL CENTER FOR GROUND WATER INFORMATION DATA BASE
500 West Wilson Bridge Road
Worthlngton, Ohio 43085
(614) 846-9355
Every Issue
Journals Regularly Indexed
Several Times/Yr.
Canadian Water Well
Ground Water
Ground Water Age
Ground Water Monitoring
Review
Johnson Driller's Journal
Journal American Water
Works Association
Journal of Hydrology
Journal Water Pollution
Control Federation
Pacific Ground Water Digest
Water Resources Bulletin
Water Resources Research
Water Well Journal
Agricultural Engineering
Agua
Drill Bit
Drilling-OWC
Environmental Monitoring
and Assessment
ES A T, Environmental
Science 4 Technology
Geothermal Energy
Geothermal Resources
Council Bulletin
Irrigation Age
Irrigation Journal
Journal of Soil and Water
Conservation
Journal of the Environmental
Engineering Division (ASCE)
Journal of the Hydraulics
Division (ASCE)
Journal of the Irrigation
and Drainage Division (ASCE)
Journal of the National Water
Well Association of Australia
Journal of the Mew England
Water Works Association
OPFlow
Soviet Hydrology
Water Engineering & Management
Water Research
Water Techno!ogy
Western Water
Few Times/Yr.
AAPG Bulletin
Arab Water World
Bottled Water Report
Drilling Contractor
Earthqake Information
Bulletin
EPA Journal
EOS
Garber-Well ington
Gazette
Geol ogy
Geological Society of
America Bulleti^',/
Geotlmes
JPT. Journal of
Petroleum Technology
Oil & Gas Journal
Services
Water Conditioning
World Oil
World Water
-------
Page 30 of 60
NOAA PRICES FOR LANDSAT
DATA, PRODUCTS AND SERVICES
EFFECTIVE OCTOBER 1, 1982
PRODUCTS AND SERVICES PRICE
Archive
Imagery Products
70 mm film positive (B & W) 5 26.
70 mm film negative (B & W) 32.
10 in. film positive (B & W) 30.
10 in. film negative (B & W) 35.
10 in. paper (B & W) 30.
20 in. paper (B & W) 58.
40 in. paper (B & W) 95.
10 in. film positive (color) 74.
10 in. paper (color) 45.
20 in. paper (color) 90.
40 in. paper (color) 175.
16 mm microfilm (B & W) 60.
35 mm slide (color), from an existing collection 4.
16 mm microfilm (color, 100' roll) 150.
Digital Products
9-track, 800 BPI CCT; MSS Scene - all available bands $ 650.
9-track, 1600 BPI CCT; MSS Scene - all available bands 650.
9-track, 6250 BPI CCT; MSS Scene - all available bands 650.
9-track, 800 BPI CCT; RBV (Single-subscene) 650.
9-track, 1600 BPI CCT; RBV (Single-subscene) 650.
9-track, 800 BPI CCT; RBV (set of 4 subscenes) 1300.
9-track, 1600 BPI CCT; RBV (set of 4 subscenes) 1300.
14-track, High Density Tape (variable content) Variable
Generation of Color Composite (false color IR)-add to product
price S 195.
Special Acquisition Data and Products
(Special Acquisition signifies Landsat D MSS scene data that are not
scheduled for routine collection, but which are provided upon user
request.)
Delivery of preprocessed digital data, to the
requestor's site via communication satellite;
per MSS scene collected at a time and place specified
by the requestor ... $ 790.
Delivery to the requestor of a frame of standard MSS
imagery (not a color composite); per MSS scene
collected at a time and place specified by the
requestor ... S 880.
Delivery to the requestor of a computer compatible
or high density digital tape; per MSS scene collected
at a time and place specified by the requestor ... $1000.
- OVER -
-------
Page 31 of 60
Acquisition Daca and Products (cone.)
PRICE
Surcharge for delivery of a color compostca to che user
originally requesting che special acquisition of an
MSS scene; per scene ... S 150.
Surcharge applied when che requestor establishes a aaxiaum
allowable cloud cover condition for che collection of an
MSS scene; per scene ... $ 250.
Subscription Services
Undsac aieroCATALOG
Annual
World (Monthly Update)
forth Zone (Monthly Update)
South Zone (Quarterly Update)
Polar Zone (Quarterly Update)
Region 1 (Monthly Update)
Region 2 (Monthly Update)
Region 3 (Quarterly Update)
Region 4 (Quarterly Update)
Region 5 (Quarterly Update)
Region 6 (Quarterly Update)
Region 7 (Quarterly Update)
Region 8 (Quarterly Update)
Region 9 (Quarterly Update)
Region 10 (Quarterly Update)
Current Edition
World
North Zone
South Zone
Polar Zone
Region I
Region 2
Region 3
Region 4
Region 5
Region 6
Region 7
Region 8
Region 9
Region 10
nicroIMAGE -icr.e (landsat D)
Annual by World, Zones, and Regions
•aicraCATALOG/aicroIMAGE rlche (Landaae D) csmbi.iaeion
Annual by World, Zones, and Regions
S1088.
503.
290.
290.
L39.
139.
52.
29.
36.
36.
65.
52.
53.
131.
S 377.
203.
102.
73.
53.
53.
7 .
6.
Price :o
be announced
Price :a
be announcad
-------
-------
PREPARATION OF WORK PLANS, SAFETY PLANS AND SAMPLING PLANS
2.4.0 INTRODUCTION
The information used to develop work plans, safety plans and sampling plans will
be based on data collected during the PA and the background data collection
step. In the sampling plan the preparer should specify as much as possible the
number and location of samples. Prior site reconnaissance can be helpful in
identifying the locations. Often an "off" site reconnaissance has been done
during the PA and may be sufficient. If the site is particularly large or complex
it may be necessary to perform an on-site reconnaissance. For the sake of
keeping travel costs to a miniumum it may be possible, without compromising
the usefulness of the sampling plan, to conduct an on-site reconnaissance the
morning of or day before the actual samples are collected. An on-site
reconnaissance prior to sampling is routinely conducted to screen the site for
safety purposes and it may be effective to couple these efforts together.
Both site reconnaissance and site inspections require the completion of work and
safety plans. In addition, site inspections require sampling plans. However,
sampling plans and safety procedures are discussed in detail later in Tabs 5 and
9.
2.4.1 PURPOSE
The purpose of a work plan is to provide a scope of work and technical approach
for site inspections (Sis) and site reconnaissance to insure the safe and efficient
performance of work on site. The work plan includes:
o Safety Plan
The purpose of a safety plan is to provide a description of the potential
physical or chemical hazards present at the site, to provide emergency
information in case of injury or illness, and to describe the dermal and
respiratory protective clothing or equipment required of all personnel for
each phase of the field work.
o Sampling Plan
The purpose of a sampling plan is to specify the location of each sample to
be taken, to detail all sampling and decontamination procedures, and to
identify the personnel to perform each task.
2.4.2 APPLICABILITY
Work, safety and sampling plans are necessary for all site inspections. Work
plans and safety plans should be prepared if a prior site reconnaissance is
necessary.
2.4.3 DEFINITIONS
None
-------
PREPARATION OF WORK PLANS
DISCUSSION
To simplify the work plan, standardize the format as much as possible. Much of
the work can be simplified by simply referencing Standard Operating Procedures,
Operating Guidelines, or Quality Assurance Procedures. The work plans are
adapted to the specific site, based on known or anticipated conditions. Provision
can be made for on-site modification of the technical approach, if there is a
possibility that on-site conditions may differ from that which was anticipated.
Basically, work plans should include the following:
o A summary of background information on the site with emphasis on how this
information can be used to identify investigation objectives.
o A statement of objectives and goals of the investigation. Typical goals
include hazardous substance inventory and documentation of pollutant
migration.
o Investigation methods required to characterize the site. Often this includes
a sampling plan, including sample types, sampling locations, sampling
procedures, and field quality control.
o Personnel requirements.
o Equipment needs.
o Any non-standard equipment and/or contract services which may be needed
to complete the investigation.
o Methods used to control contaminated materials including decontamination
procedures, solutions to be used and storage or disposal obligations.
o Special training requirements.
o Organization of special teams.
As this list indicates, the work plan allows the investigation team to efficiently
schedule such resources as manpower, equipment and laboratory ser/ices in
advance of a proposed investigation. The work plan is thus an essential tool in
the investigation of hazardous substance sites.
A comprehensive site-specific safety plan must be developed before an
investigation team is permitted to go on-site. Hazardous substance site
investigations may present extraordinary hazards to personnel. Therefore,
certain basic safety principles must be adhered to at all times. The major
emphasis of safety planning for site investigation should be to develop safety
consciousness, to integrate safety knowledge with field procedures, and to avoid
both chemical contamination and physical hazards.
-------
PREPARATION OF WORK PLANS
This section will discuss the development of work plans. Safety procedures and
safety plans are discussed in depth later in Tab 9. Sampling plans are discussed
in Tab 5.
2.4.5 RESPONSIBILITY
The project manager is responsible for the completion of work plans and safety
plans. When completed, the work plan and safety plan undergo technical
reviews. The plans should be signed, indicating approval by all appropriate
personnel. The plan should have a cover sheet which is signed by the author
(usually the project manager), the QA Representative, and any other appropriate
personnel.
2.*.6 PROCEDURE
After a background information search is completed for a site, a site
reconnaissance may be deemed necessary. The background information is then
utilized as the basis for determining a technical approach and safety plan.
The author of the Work Plan must have a thorough understanding of the site, its
surroundings, and the nature and extent of possible contamination and hazards.
It is necessary to be familiar with all the information which has been assembled
during the background data review and preliminary assessment.
The HRS forms should be completed as much as is possible using the available
information. This will help to point out the specific areas which require
sampling or additional data for scoring. The work plan can then concentrate on
these areas.
The scope of work must be clearly defined. What on-site or off-site work will
be required0 Will other agencies or contractors be involved, or will all work be
conducted as an "in-house" project0
There may be other factors which must be considered as they may greatly affect
the project:
o Time How much time is allotted for this project0 Is the schedule flexible,
or are there stringent deadlines?
o Budget - What are the budget limitations? How many sample analyses can
be included? If the project runs several days, living expenses for employees
may be necessary.
o Personnel Availability
o Equipment Availability
o Training - Will special training be required to efficiently perform the work?
-------
PREPARATION OF WORK PLANS
Special considerations must be given to aspects of the work which may vary
greatly from site to site.
o Hazards - What physical or chemical hazards may be encountered? How
will they affect the time, expense, personnel requirements or equipment
needed for the project? Safety for the project team and the public is of
primary importance.
o Site Location - Is the site accessible? How far is it from the laboratory
or "home office"? Will samples need to be shipped to the laboratory?
o Timing - Can site be adequately sampled at this time or year, or will
frozen ground or swampy conditions limit sampling? Is the site
frequented at certain times by the public, for example, a playground after
school hours? Will work performed in the winter be limited by short
daylight hours? Have recent rains or dry periods affected water levels?
An example Work Plan format follows.
-------
WPF 2/1/85
Page 1 of 11
Work Plan No.
Revision
NUS CORPORATION
WORK PLAN
FOR THE
Located in
Prepared by
Region II
Raritan Plaza III
Fieldcrest Avenue
Edison, New Jersey 08837
Preparer:
Date:
Re view/Approval:
QA Representative
Date:
Review/Approval:
State SI Program Manager
Date:
-------
WPF 2/1/35
Page 2 of 11
WORK PLAN FOR A
WORK ASSIGNMENT REQUIRING FIELD WORK
PROJECT SUMMARY
TDD No: AJ'/A fo 5-fo.V
-------
WPF 2/1/85
Page 3 of 11
PROJECT SUMMARY (cont'd)
Deliverable/Final Product (e.g. reports, etc):
Deliverable/Final Product To Be Reviewed By ( ):
Chief Project Manager
Editorial Review (Non-Technical Review)
Non-Editorial Technical Review Committee - List Names
QA Representative (to ensure document was subject to the
appropriate review process)
AJ//3 fo S Varc, Assistant Regional Project Manager
AJ//3 f-o StoAc Regional Project Manager
Site History/Description:
Prepare brief description of the site (landfill, drum storage, etc.), conclusions from
past data assessments, and indicate the current or past operators.
-------
WPF 2/1/35
Page H of 11
PROJECT OVERVIEW
Technical Approach (reference sampling plan, if attached):
Attach Additional Sheets If Necessary
Personnel Assignments (provide each dicipline and number of personnel required)
NOTE: Please provide detailed description of duties and responsibilities.
Chemists:
Hydrogeologists:
Toxicologists:
Environmental
Scientists/
Engineers:
Others:
-------
WPF 2/1/85
Page 5 of 11
PROJECT OVERVIEW (cont'd)
Schedule of Activities:
See attachment: Ref#: Date:
Referenced Background Data:
List background reference material
Attach Additional Sheets If Necessary
Safety and Health Considerations:
Refer to the attachment A, the site safety plan which has been approved by the
Regional Safety Officer and RPM.
Ref//: Date:
(Safety Officer Approval Date)
-------
WPF 2/1/85
Page 6 of 11
ESTIMATED COST ASSOCIATED WITH ANALYTICAL SUPPORT
Total Analysis*
Type of Analysis Unit Cost($)* No. of Samples Costs($)
Total Cost of all Analysis Requested:
Reference and attach additional pages if necessary.
*If required, include Special Analytical Services (SAS) cost estimates.
-------
WPF 2/1/85
Page 7 of 11
PROJECT OVERVIEW (cont'd)
Required Resource List (for equipment, list major items only):
Reference to attached list is acceptable
Item When Needed Remarks
Interface/Planning Requirements: (reference attachments if necessary)
IiuerEd'ze with EPA:
Interface with other State/Local Agencies:
Site Access Arrangements (site contact, etc.):
Training Requirements:
-------
WPF 2/1/85
Page 8 of 11
RECORDS AND DOCUMENTATION
Check off records that will be generated during this project:
General:
Work Assignment document/ Photographs
close-out
Work Plan Drilling Logs
Safety Plan Correspondence (Telecon
Notes, Memos, Letters,
Sampling Plan etc.)
Log Books Reports, Memos, etc.
Chain of Custody Records
Traffic Reports
Special Analytical Svcs. Pkg.
List
Airbills
Other (list below or
(reference
attachment)
Quality Assurance:
Records of Non-Editorial Reviews Project Kickoff Meeting:
Work Plan/Safety Plan
Records of Editorial Reviews Distribution, Documenta-
tion, Notes, etc.
QA Records Log Calibration Records
(for HNu, OVA, etc.)
Procurement Documents (list below requests for bids and proposals, subcontract
consultant agreements, etc.):
Other Records (list below):
-------
WPF 2/1/85
Page 9 of 11
REFERENCED STANDARD OPERATING
GUIDELINES FOR PROJECT ACTIVITIES
Please check off the following tasks that will be performed during the course of
the project. Then, at the bottom of the page and on subsequent pages, describe
fully, for each task, the appropriate procedures and actions that will be taken
to provide both quality assurance and quality control. If a given task has
standard operating guidance (SOG) that is documented, please refer to that
guidance. The primary reference would be State Agency Standard Operating
Procedures. List others as appropriate.
Document/Section Description
Ambient Air Sampling (OVA, HNU, etc.)
Ground-Water Sampling
Surface-Water Sampling
Soil/Sediment Sampling
Tap Water Sampling
Land Surveying
Electrical Resistivity Survey
Electromagnetic Survey
[Magnetometer Survey
Metal Detection Survey
Ground Penetrating Radar Survey
Seismic Survey
Water Level Measurements
Perimeter Survey
Site Inspection
Soil Borings/Well Installation
Bedrock Fracture Analysis
Pump/Permeability Tests
Preparation of Water Table Maps
Preparation of Bedrock Contour Maps
-------
WPF 2/1/85
Page 10 of 11
REFERENCED STANDARD OPERATING
GUIDELINES FOR PROJECT ACTIVITIES
Others (list below):
Determination of Ground-Water Flow
Decontamination Procedures
-------
WPF 2/1/85
Page 11 of 11
APPLICABILITY
The folding portions of the NUS Superfund Division Quality Assurance Manual
are applicable to the performance of specific work elements defined in
TDD ///L/M fu StoA-t. • The quality assurance procedures recognized in Region II
FIT follow applicable operating guidelines provided in the preeceeding section of
this work plan.
( ) Number
QAP 2.5
QAP 3.1
QAP 4.1
QAP 4.2
QAP 5.1
QAP 5.2
QAP 6.1
QAP 7.1
QAP 7.2
QAP 7.3
QAP 7.4
QAP 7.5
QAP 8.1
QAP 8.2
QAP9.1.F2
QAP 9.2.F2
QAP 10.1
QAP 11.1
QAP 11.2
QAP 12.1
QAP 13.1
QAP 14.1
QAP 15.1
QAP 16.1
QAP 17.4
QAP 17.6
Subject
Work Plans
Control of Remedial Design Activities
Field Data Collection
Data Reduction, Validation, and Reporting
Preparation of Procurement Documents
Subcontractor Quality Assurance Requirements
Preparation of Instructions and Procedures
Identification of Controlled Evidentiary
Documents
Issuance and Distribution of Controlled
Documents
Development, Documentation, Verification, and
Retention of Software Programs
Technical Reports
Interim Document Review Procedure
Control of Procurement Activities
Evaluation and Selection of Subcontractors
Chain of Custody
Sample Control
Analysis Techniques
Offsite Reconnaissance
Onsite Inspections
Implementation of Measuring and Test Equipment Controls
Materials
Packaging, Marking, Labeling, and Shipping of
Samples from Hazardous-Waste Sites
Nonconformance Reporting, Evaluation, and
Disposition
Implementation and Documentation of Corrective
Actions
Storage and Retrieval of Quality Assurance
Records
Preparation for Audit
Quality Notices
-------
WPF
ATTACHMENT A
SAFETY PLAN
(Must have Identifying Control #)
-------
WPF
ATTACHMENT B
SAMPLING PLAN
(Must have Identifying Control //)
-------
, 5- .r fa****.*-
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE
REVIEW PROCEDURES
2.5.1 PURPOSE
To ensure completeness and that the appropriate quality assurance requirements
have been met and are in compliance with established plans and manuals (i.e.
State Agency Quality Assurance Manual).
2.5.2 APPLICABILITY
The Quality Assurance review procedure is applicable to all
Work/Safety/Sampling Plans, and other deliverables and records, including the
MRS Model.
2.5.3 DEFINITIONS
None
2.5.* DISCUSSION
None
2.5.5 RESPONSIBILITIES
Prior to the commencement of field activities, a comprehensive
Work/Safety/Sampling plan should be reviewed and approved by various
disciplines within the management structure of the office.
Initially, upon completion of the plan by the Project Manager, it is reviewed by
the State Office Site Investigation Coordinator. The Health and Safety Officer
then reviews the Health and Safety portion of the plan and once approved the
entire Work/Safety/Sampling Plan is given to the office Quality Assurance
Manager. It is the responsibility of the Quality Assurance Manager to review the
entire Work/Safety/Sampling Plan to ensure that the implementation of all
quality assurance requirements and procedures as defined in established plans
and manuals are satisfied. Once the Quality Assurance Manager approves the
Work/Safety/Sampling plan it is given to the responsible Office Manager for final
approval.
2.5.6 PROCEDURES
In addition to ensuring that all quality assurance requirements are met, the
Quality Assurance Manager reviews the Work/Safety/Sampling Plan for
consistency and completeness.
The following highlights the type of information generally checked by the
Quality Assurance Manager:
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE REVIEW
EPA
STATE OFFICE
STATE SI COORDINATOR
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SITE PROJECT MANAGER
QA MANAGER
SITE PROJECT TEAM
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE
REVIEW PROCEDURES
o Document contains proper approval signatures
o Consistency of Project and Document/Report Numbers throughout entire
Work/Safety/Sampling Plan
o Overall Scope of Work detailed in a Summary of Assignment section
o Logical account of site history and site description
o All letters, reports, etc. to be generated are described completely
o All major items which are planned to be used are included (OVA, hNu, etc.)
o Critical phases or points of the project, if major in scope, are outlined.
o Sampling plan is attached with proper date and document number
o Completeness of individual responsibilities and consistency of names
throughout Work/Safety Plan
o Activities or tasks to be performed during scope of work are checked off and
proper Standard Operating Guidelines sections are referenced.
o Applicable Quality Assurance Requirements and Procedures are notated and
checked off
o In Sampling Plan, Operating Guidelines sections consistent with those listed in
the work plan should be referenced. Should not see "blanket" reference to
guidelines.
2.5.7 RECORDS
A copy of the work plan is retained in the appropriate project file once completed.
Once the site inspection is completed, the field logbook is also incorporated into the
project file.
The logbook is considered a controlled evidentiary document and can be used in legal
proceedings. It is a necessity that the logbook provides proper documentation and a
clear picture of all field activities. These field notes may be used to prepare
responses to interrogatories filed by attorneys during litigation involving a site. (A
portion of an example interrogatory is included at the end of this section).
The following provides an example of the type of information that may be extracted
from the logbook:
1) All personnel on site during field activities.
2) A complete description of each sample.
3) The exact depth from which each sample was taken.
*0 The date and time that each sample was taken.
5) The decontamination procedure(s) used to ensure there were no cross-
contamination of samples.
6) The results of any field measurements taken during the collection of each
sample.
Figure 2.5-1 provides an example of typical logbook entries. Each logbook page
must be signed by the person taking the field documentation as well as by a second
person to ensure the clarity and completeness of the field notes.
-------
FIGURE 2.5-1
i»:
.J". /
V. .S.n//Ji-
•IIMU-n- .r^n ma IPO
I no
\n T-o „_ ., , _Jt:, ,1 ^_,!^^_C
,•)!>'
6.
ii/ULL _ Wo rc
G.
'
HOP
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE
REVIEW PROCEDURES
2.5.7.1 AUDITS
Audits are also a function of the overall Quality Assurance program in an office.
These audits are conducted to verify compliance with the established quality
assurance program.
Generally, two types of in-house audits are performed:
o Internal audits of Project Related Files and Activities
o Internal audits of Onsite Activities
AUDITS OF PROJECT RELATED FILES AND ACTIVITIES
When an audit is conducted on Project Related Files and Activities, an
evaluation of the file contents is made. The following provides a guidance on the
type of information an auditor would look for:
o Are complete project plans available?
o Are approval signatures affixed on applicable plans/documents?
o Are all revisions to the plan accounted for?
o Is the logbook present?
o Does the logbook contain legible signed and dated entries?
o Is document of review apparent?
AUDITS ON ONSITE ACTIVITIES
Audits of onsite field activities are conducted to ensure onsite compliance with
established quality assurance procedures and guidelines. While on site the
auditor would make many procedural checks, including the following:
o Was a sampling plan generated and/or revised to meet the actual work
performed and approved?
o Is there a site safety plan onsite with approval signatures0
o Is a site sketch present in the logbook which depicts locations where
samples were collected?
o Is project logbook signed and dated following each entry and correction?
o Are samples collected in the appropriate types of containers as specified in
the project sampling plan?
o Is the sample collection being conducted according to the appropriate
Standard Operating Guidelines?
Both type of audits are important, as they help identify problem areas, if any,
with project related work procedures. By implementing these audits, any
necessary corrective action to the procedures or overall program can be made.
-------
SAMPLE
INTERROGATORY
-------
(o) the size and volume of such sample.
11. for each and every testing and analysis identified in your ansver to
interrogatory 10(h), please state fully and in complete detail:
(b) the location where such testing and analysis took place, including but
not limited to, street address, town and state;
(c) a complete description of all procedures and protocols followed in
conducting such testing and analysis;
(d) the precise quantitative and qualitative results of such testing and
analysis;
(e) the precise reasons such testing and analysis was conducted;
(f) the exact cost of such testing and analysis;
(9) the date and time of day of such testing and analysis;
(h) the quality assurance and control procedures used for such analysis;
(i) the detection limits of such testing and analytical methods; and
(j) the volume, and weight of the sample of such testing and analysis.
12. For each and every soil sample removed by the plaintiff, its agents,
servants or employees from property owned by or
its predecessor, please state fully and in complete detail:
(a) a complete description of such sample;
(b) the exact location from which such sample was taken, giving
measurements in feet and inches from fixed objects and boundaries;
(c) the exact depth in feet and inches from which such sample was taken;
(d) the name and address of each person taking such sample;
(e) the name and address of each person present when such sample was taken;
(f) the date and time of day such sample was taken;
(g) the exact legal authority relied upon in taking such samples,
including the full citation of each statute and other law relied upon;
(h) a complete description of any and all testing and analysis done on
such sample;
(i) the rationale for collecting such samples at the identified location;
-------
(j) the procedures foe collecting such sample;
(k) the chain of custody focn used to transfer such sample;
(1) the decontamination procedures used to ensue* there were no
cross-contamination of samples;
(m) sample preservation and shipment procedures for such sample; and
(n) the results of any field measurements taken during the collection of
such sample.
i3. For each and every testing and analysis identified in your answer to
interrogatory 12(h), please state fully and in complete detail:
(a) the name, address, employer and occupation of each person conducting
such testing and analysis;
(b) the location where such testing and analysis took place, including but
not limited to, street address, town and state;
(c) a complete description of all procedures and protocols followed in
conducting such testing and analysis;
(d) the precise quantitative and qualitative results of such testing and
analysis;
(e) the precise reasons'such testing and analysis was conducted;
(f) the exact cost of such testing and anaylsis;
(g) the date and tune of day of such testing and analysis;
(h) the quality assurance and control procedures used for such analysis;
(i) the detection limits of such testing and analytical methods;
(]} the volume and weight of the sample of such testing and analysis; and
• (k) the type of equipment used for such testing and the calibration
results of such equipment.
14. For each and every water sample removed by the plaintiff, its agents,
servants or employees from property owned by
please state fully and in complete detail:
(a) a complete description of such sample;
' (b) the exact location from which such sample was taken, giving
measurements in feet and inches from fixed objects and boundaries;
(c) the exact depth in feet and inches from which such sample was taken;
(d) the name and address of each person taking such sanple;
(e) the name and address of each person present when such sample was taken;
(f) the date and time of day such sample was taken;
-------
(g) the «xact legal authority relied upon in taking such samples,
including the full citation of each statute and other law relied upon;
(h) a complete description of any and all tasting and analysis don* on
such sample;
(i) the elevation of the water surf act froa which such sample was taken;
(j) the rational* for collecting such sauries at th« identified location;
(k) the procedures for collecting such sample;
(1) the chain of custody form used to transfer such sample;
(m) the decontamination procedures used to ensure there were no
cross-contamination of samples;
(n) sample preservation and shipment procedures for such sample;
(o) the results of any field measurements taken during the collection of
such .sample; and
(p) the size and volume of such sample.
r
'.5. For «ach and every testing and analysis identified in your answer to
interrogatory l4(h), please state fully and in complete detail:
(a) the name, 'address, employer and occupation of each person conducting
such testing and analysis;
v. , the location where such testing and analysis took place, including but
not limited to, street address, town and state;
(c) a complete description of all procedures and protocols followed in
conducting such testing and analysis;
x
(d) the precise quantitative and qualitative results of such testing and
analysis;
(e) the precise reasons such testing and analysis was conducted;
(f) the exact cost of such testing and analysis;
(g) the date and time of day of such testing and analysis;
(h) the quality assurance and control procedures used for such analysis;
(i) the detection limits of such testing and analytical methods; and
(]} the volume and weight of the sample of such testing and analysis.
For each and every water sample removed by the plaintiff r its aqents,
servants or employees from property owned by or
its -edecessors, please state fully and in complete detail:
-------
-9-
(f ) t!» exact cost of such testing and analysis;
(9) the date and tia» of day of such testing and analysis;
(h) the quality assurance and control procedures used for such analysis;
(i) the detection limits of such testing and analytical methods; and
(j) the volume and weight of the sample of such testing and analysis.
18. with respect to statement that "The River is the discharqe
point for essentially all the groundvater leaving the
site,' as stated in the Design studies Report for Bnergency Action.
Page 11, please summarize and list the specific data that were evaluated
to maXe this assessment.
13. With respect to statement that sediments underlying the
River contained significant levels of volatile or organic constituents,
please state fully and in complete detail:
(a) the specific concentrations detected;
(b) the specific contaminants detected;
(c) the exact location such specific concentrations were located, giving
measurements in feet and inches from fixed objects and boundaries;
(d) how the headspace analyses relate to analyses of the sediments; and
(e) the specific procedures and protocols used for sample collection and
analysis.
20. Please state fully and in complete detail how aquifer coefficients were
determined such as transmissivity/ porosity, and hydraulic conductivity.
21. Please describe fully and in complete detail all Laboratory Quality
Assurance/Quality Control Programs used for all soil and water sampling,
testing and analysis perforoed in connection with the plaintiff's
investigation of the .site.
22. Please state fully and in complete detail the rationale for determining
monitoring well locations.
23. Please state fully and in complete detail the rationale for determining
well screen depths.
24. Please state fully and in complete detail each manner in which the site
investigations performed by changed the original remedial
investigation worX plan proposed by the NUS Corporation in May, 1383.
Jlmji. JLULL Li A. ilium
Lumi »Lllj in Uie- ULiiuLj u£ Uiu ujfce.
26. For each and every planned and/or on-going interim remedial or other
action being taken by the plaintiff, its agents, servants and employees at
the site, please state fully and in complete detail:
-------
A j
SDEXILEA
AS USED IN THIS SCHEDULE/ THE WORD "DOCUMENTS" SHALL INCLUDE, BUT
NOT BE LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING: PAPERS, BOOKS, RECORDS, LETTERS,
PHOTOGRAPHS/ TANGIBLE THINGS, CORRESPONDENCE, COMMUNICATIONS, TELEGRAMS,
CABLES, TELEX MESSAGES, MEMORANDA, NOTES, NOTATIONS, LABORATORY WORK
PAPERS, OTHER WORK PAPERS, LEDGER SHEETS, TRANSCIPTS, MINUTES, REPORTS
AND RECORDINGS OF TELEPHONE OR OTHER CONVERSATIONS, OR OF INTERVIEWS, OR
OF CONFERENCES, OR OF OTHER MEETINGS, AFFIDAVITS, STATEMENTS, SUttWUES,
OPINIONS, REPORTS, STUDIES, DRAFTS OF REPORTS, DRAFTS OF STUDIES,
ANALYSES, BULLETINS, NOTICES, ANNOUNCEMENTS, ADVERTISEMENTS, INSTRUCTIONS,
CHARTS, MANUALS, BROCHURES, PUBLICATIONS, SCHEDULES, JOURNALS, STATISTICAL
RECORDS, DESK CALENDARS, APPOINTMENT BOOKS, DIARIES, LISTS, LOGS, FIELD
LOGS, TABULATIONS, SOUND RECORDINGS, COMPUTER PRINTOUTS, GAS CHRCMATOGRAMS
MASS SPECTRA, DATA PROCESSING, PROGRAM LIBRARY, DATA PROCESSING INPUT
AND OUTPUT, MICROFILM, BOOKS OF ACCOUNT, RECORDS, INVOICES, DIAGRAMS,
GRAPHS, GRAPHS OR MATERIALS WITH HANDWRITING OR OTHER PRINTING.ON THEM,
BOOKS, LIBRARY REFERENCES, TEXTBOOKS, TREATISES, GOVERNMENT PUBLICATIONS,
s
AND ANY OTHER DOCUMENTS OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER CONCERNING OR RELATED IN
ANY WAY TO THE CLAIMS ASSERTED BY THE UNITED STATES,
-------
-------
PERSONNEL ASSIGNMENTS
2.6.1 PURPOSE
Careful consideration must be given to the personnel assigned to each task to
insure safe and efficient work.
2.6.2 APPLICABILITY
Proper personnel assignments are an integral part of executing site inspections.
Assigning the right task to the most appropriate individual assures quality data
production.
2.6.3 DEFINITIONS
None
2.6.4 DISCUSSION
Inspections at sites containing potentially hazardous materials present many
hazards, physical conditions and situations requiring a wide variety of
administrative controls, technical expertise and scientific support to ensure the
safe collection of reliable data.
Team size and organization should be tailored to meet site specific conditions
including, but not limited to the following considerations:
o Nature and extent of problem
o Site safety considerations
o Scope of work
o Budget considerations
Collectively, the above considerations will establish the number of functions to be
carried out by team members. The number and complexity of the functions will
then determine the number of personnel required to safely and expeditiously carry
out the work. In any circumstance, each team member will have to assume more
than one function. For safety reasons, no less than two people should ever perform
a site entry, even for a simple reconnaissance which does not involve sampling.
This application of the "buddy system" provides a way to ensure that assistance is
available in the event of a mishap. Even the simplest sampling efforts require a
practical minimum of three people, each of whom must assume more than one
function. An example three-person sampling team might have functions distributed
as follows:
Person 1 Person 2 Person 3
Project Manager Safety Officer Monitoring Equipment
Log book Decontamination Sampler
Photography Sample tracking
Emergency response
Team functions are discussed in further detail below.
-------
PERSONNEL ASSIGNMENTS
General Staffing
The basic staffing requirements of a site inspection should include individuals with the
expertise necessary for successful completion of the project. If. possible, each team
should consist of individuals with varying backgrounds. The disciplines desirable for a
particular site depend on the nature of the site, and the availability of personnel. For
example, a chemical engineer would be useful while at a chemical plant, while a biologist
or botanist would be useful in a more wooded, or wetland, area. Other disciplines
typically desirable include Geology, Environmental Science, Soil Science, Toxicology or
Public Health.
Team Functions
In addition to disciplinary considerations for team composition, each member is assigned a
specific project function. Project functions may include but are not limited to the
following:
o Site Project Management
The Site Project Management function includes insuring that all steps in the site
inspection are performed in accordance with the requirements defined in the
standard operating procedures. Also, the Project Manager is ultimately
responsible for the final selection of sampling locations at the study site, the use
of safety procedures, and all other decisions made in the field that might be
critical to the success of the study. He or she must document or assign someone
to document the justification for each decision in the field log, as well as in the
subsequent study report. The Project Manager must therefore be experienced in
field investigation procedures and possess the necessary technical expertise to
conduct such studies.
o Site Safety Officer
The site safety officer observes all field operations and personnel, or may remain
at the decontamination area in order to monitor all downrange operations.
Downrange personnel are either in the safety person's line of sight or other
individuals are located between the safety person and the downrange personnel in
order to maintain an unbroken, person-to-person line of sight. The specific
responsibilities of the site safety officer are as follows:
1. Monitors the work time and physical condition of all personnel.
2. Makes all decisions concerning protective equipment and monitors all
activities to remove personnel from any unsafe work conditions or
unsafe work acts.
If the site safety officer goes into the work area to observe work practices, he/she is
replaced at the decontamination area by another person, who assumes the safety officer's
responsibilities and emergency action authority.
-------
PERSONNEL ASSIGNMENTS
o Samplers/Field Personnel
These are the individuals who complete all downrange operations. On large teams, extra
field personnel may assist with decontamination or command post operations.
Other Team Functions
If the site or level of protection requires more personnel, the on-site personnel described
below are used:
o Decontamination personnel
o Rescue person
o Photographer
o Documentation personnel
o Air monitoring personnel
o Quality assurance personnel
o Community contact
o Equipment supervisor
It is possible that one person can fulfill the responsibilities of several positions.
Typically, the basic team consists of the project manager and safety officer. If sampling
is required, a sampler is added, and someone assumes the responsibilities of sample
management. A separate sample management officer is preferred if enough personnel are
available. To avoid confusion, and to efficiently complete the abundant paperwork
involved in sample management, limit the sample management to one or two people.
If the site is more complex, or if time is limited, more personnel may be added. For
instance, one person for air monitoring, another for decontamination.
If the site is large, or if several areas are to be sampled simultaneously, sampling teams
can be established, each with a team leader, safety officer, and samplers. The Project
Manager would then oversee all work through the team leaders.
2.6.5 RESPONSIBILITY
The selection of the project team is the responsiblity of the Project Manager, who
should be familiar with the experience and background of available personnel.
-------
TWO-PERSON TEAM
PERSON I- "clean" Person
-PROJECT MANAGER
-LOG BOOK
-PHOTOGRAPHY
-MONITORING EQUIPMENT
-DECON OF PERSON II
PERSON II- "dirty" Person
-SAFETY OFFICER
-SAMPLING
-DECON OF PERSON I
SHARED: SAMPLE MANAGEMENT
MOBILIZATION
DEMOBILIZATION
ADVANTAGES
1. LESS PERSONNEL-RELATED COSTS
DISADVANTAGES
1. BUSY FIELD TEAM-MAY GET HECTIC
2. AWKWARD DECON PROCEDURES
3. NO EMERGENCY OR RESCUE PEOPLE AVAILABLE
4. FIELD WORK TAKES LONGER-WOULDNT WORK ON LARGER SITES
5. QC DIFFICULT TO MAINTAIN
6. LIMITS SOME TYPES OF WORK WHERE MANPOWER IS NEEDED
FIGURE 2.6.1
-------
THREE-PERSON TEAM
METHOD 1
PERSON l-'clean"
-PROJECT MANAGER
-LOG BOOK
-PHOTOGRAPHY
-MONITORING INSTRUMENTS
-DECON
-SAMPLE MANAGEMENT
PERSON H-"dlrty°
-ASSISTS SAMPLER
-DECON
-SAFETY OFFICER
-ASSISTS WITH SAMPLE
MANAGEMENT
-MOBILIZATION
PERSON Ill-'dlrty"
-SAMPLER
-DECON
-DEMOBILIZATION
METHOD 2
PERSON l-Offslte
"clean"
-SAFETY OFFICER & RESCUE
-SAMPLE MANAGEMENT
-MOBILIZATION
-COMMUNITY CONTRACT
PERSON ll-Onsite
"clean"
-PROJECT MANAGER
-PHOTOGRAPHY
-MONITORING INSTRUMENTS
-LOG BOOK
-ASSISTS SAMPLER
-DECON
-ASSISTS WITH SAMPLE
MANAGEMENT
-MOBILIZATION
PERSON III- "dlrt\
-SAMPLER
-DECON
-DEMOBILIZATION
-MOBILIZATION
ADVANTAGES
1. MORE MANPOWER AVAILABLE
2. EASIER TO MOBILIZE & DEMOBILIZE
3. BETTER SAFETY AND RESCUE SYSTEM
4. BETTER DECON PROCEDURES
DISADVANTAGES
1. STILL TOO DIFFICULT TO MAINTAIN SAMPLE QC (Too many hands)
2. PROJECT MANAGER TOO BUSY, MAY CONTAMINATE EQUIPMENT
3. NO 'LINE OF SITE" ON LARGE SITE
4. SAFETY OFFICER TOO BUSY TO WATCH FIELD PROCEDURES
5. MORE LIKELY TO MISS DOCUMENTATION
FIGURE 2.6.2
-------
FOUR-PERSON TEAM
PERSON l-Offslte "clean1
-SAMPLE MANAGEMENT
-MOBILIZATION
PERSON Il-Onslte "clean"
-SAFETY OFFICER
-DECON
-RESCUE
-MONITORING INSTRUMENTS
-DEMOBILIZATION
PERSON III- Onslte "clean"
- PROJECT MANAGER
- LOG BOOK
- PHOTOGRAPHY
-COMMUNITY CONTACT
PERSON IV- "dirty"
-SAMPLER
- MOBILIZATION
- DEMOBILIZATION
FOUR-PERSON TEAM
ADVANTAGES
1. BEST USE OF PERSONNEL
2. CLEAN ZONES ISOLATED FROM CONTAMINATED AREAS
3. EFFECTIVE SAMPLE MANAGEMENT
4. SAFETY OFFICER CAN FOCUS ON HEALTH AND SAFETY
5. PERSONNEL AVAILABLE ON SITE IN CASE OF DIFFICULTIES
6. LINE OF SITE EASIER TO MAINTAIN
7. CONTINUOUS AIR MONITORING IS POSSIBLE
8. MOST ROUTINE WORK CAN BE COMPLETED SAFELY
FIGURE 2.6.3
-------
2.7
-------
MOBILIZATION
2.7.1 PURPOSE
The purpose of this section is to emphasize the importance of mobilization on
large and small projects.
2.7.2 APPLICABILITY
Mobilization is an integral part of site investigations. The mobilization phase,
when properly executed, helps the site investigation run smoothly and properly,
thus producing data that can be used in the MRS model.
2.7.3 DEFINITIONS
None
2.7.* DISCUSSION
2.7.4.1 PRE-MOBILIZATION
Prior to the start of mobilization, the Project Manager (PM) must familiarize
himself/herself with the Scope of Work. The Project Manager must have a
complete understanding of the project in order to mobilize the proper personnel
and equipment for the project.
The Project Manager must establish a sequence of field activities for the project
once he has familiarized himself with the Scope of Work. The sequence of Field
Activities must follow an orderly and logical pattern that is designed to
complete the project in a reasonable time period based on the Project Manager's
available resources. The PM's resources may be limited by available personnel,
equipment, and budget. The lack of available resources becomes the limiting
factor for a project. The limiting factors must be identified in the early stages
of project planning and mobilization to foresee and avoid future problems and
make appropriate contingency plans.
The project can be divided into phases after a sequence of field activities has
been established. The phases should break the project up into major work
categories. Examples of phases are mobilization, on-site reconnaissance,
sampling, sample management and demobilization. For more complicated
projects where wells are drilled and samples mailed to a lab, there may be
additional steps for drilling and sample shipping.
At this point in the pre-mobilization stage, an appropriate project time frame
can be established. The time frame for the job is from the start to finish and is
based on the estimated time needed to complete the job. Limiting factors must
be taken into consideration when determining the project time frame. The
limiting factors will have the biggest influence on the project time frame.
Time frames can be established for each phase of the project. The time frames
can be plotted on a chronologic bar chart to see where each phase begins and
ends and its relative duration with respect to the project (See Figure 2.7-1).
-------
PHASE
SITE RECEIVED
REVIEWED BACK-
QROUND/P A
OBTAIN SITE ACCESS
NOTIFY LAB FOR SPACE
PREPARE W/S PLAN FOR SI
OBTAIN LAB CONFIRMATION
QA W/S PLAN FOR SI
MOBILIZATION
CONDUCT SI
DEMOBILIZATION
LAB DATA RECEIVED FOR
PRELIMINARY DATA REVIEW
QUALITY ASSURED DATA
RECEIVED
PREPARE SI REPORT.MRS
QA SI REPORTERS
WEEKS
1 2
_J L
3
_L
8
_JL
12
13
14
_J
SITE INSPECTION SCHEDULE
FIGURE 2.7-1
-------
MOBILIZATION
To further understand the complexity of the problem, the following RCRA
regulations should be consulted in the Code of Federal Regulations:
o 40CFR Part 260 - Hazardous Waste Management: General
o 40CFR Part 261 - Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste
o 40CFR Part 262 - Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous
Waste
o 40CFR Part 263 - Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous
Waste
o 40CFR Part 264 Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous
Waste Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facilities
The degree to which the disposition of investigation-derived wastes poses a
problem is typically dependent upon whether the site is inactive and/or
abandoned, or, active. At abandoned or inactive sites disposable clothing and
decontamination fluids can generally be left on-site. If the site is active, or
if there are signs that an abandoned site is frequented by people (hunters,
children on trail bikes, etc.) arrangements may have to be made to transport
and dispose of the waste off-site. In some instances, arrangements can be
made with the site operator to accommodate the disposal of investigation-
derived waste. If off-site removal and disposal are required, the project
manager should insure that a mechanism exists to procure the proper
transport and disposal services.
-------
EXPENDABLE EQUIPMENT
Quantity Amount
Item Packaged Required
CHEMICALS
Acetone 5 gal.
Acetone 1 gal.
Trichloroethane 5 gal.
Trichloroethane 1 gal.
Methylene-chloride 5 gal.
Methylene-chloride 1 gal.
Hexane 1 gal.
Gasoline 1 gal.
Gasoline 5 gal.
Nitric Acid 1 gal.
Nitric Acid 5 ml.
Sodium Hydroxide 1 liter
Motor Oil 1 qt.
2-Cycle Oil 1/2 pt.
Alconox 1 gal.
Baking Soda 2 Ib. box
BOOTS
Butyl Rubber Boots
Hip Boots Size
SAMPLE CONTAINERS
40 ml. VOA Bottles 1 each |C
Yi gal. Amber Bottle 1 each ; C
1 liter Amber Bottle 1 each
8 oz. Glass Jars 1 each . o
1 liter Plastic Bottles 1 each
-------
EXPENDABLE EQUIPMENT (Conf d)
Quantity Amount
Item Packaged Required
GLOVES
Neoprene
Viton
Butyl Rubber
Cotton Work
Latex
Leather Work
P.V.C. Surgical
CHEMICAL RESISTANT COVERALLS
Tyvek SM
Tyvek MED
Tyvek LG
Tyvek XLG / Q
Tyvek XXLG
Saranex SM
Saranex MED
Saranex LG
Saranex XLG / 0
Saranex XXL
SAMPLE TUBES
Glass Tube .5 mm x 300 mm 1 each
Glass Tube 1 mml x 300 mm 1 each
P.V.C. Tube 2" x 10' 1 each
P.V.C. Tube V x 1C' 1 each
-------
EXPENDABLE EQUIPMENT (Con?d)
Item
Quantity
Packaged
Amount
Required
FILM
C-135-36-100-Prints
C-135-36-200-Prints
C-l 35-36-WO-Prints
C-135-2
-------
MOBILIZATION
2.7.4.2 Mobilization
Two major considerations that a Project Manager must keep in mind during the
mobilization phase are personnel and equipment.
Manpower assignments should be made keeping scope of work and personnel
expertise in mind. Different projects will have a varying degree of complexity
requiring the Project Manager to adjust his personnel requirements accordingly.
In addition, the scope of certain projects may dictate that an "expert" in a
particular technical area be included. If such a need arises, the Project Manager
should recognize the requirement in advance, and plan for the appropriate
individual to be included on the project team.
An equipment list should be made in the early stages of mobilization. A
preprinted equipment list for all similar projects makes equipment securing
simpler. The Project Manager should distribute the equipment list to all
concerned field personnel for their input.
Once the equipment needed for a project is realized, it is the responsibility of
the Project Manager to make sure such equipment is secured. Using the
complete equipment list with all required equipment for the project checked off,
the Project Manager or his designee should obtain the equipment in advance of
the projected field work. (See example of equipment list at the end of this
section.)
On large scale or long term projects, it may be necessary to establish an
extensive command post consisting of offices, personnel decontamination units,
and eating facilities. The establishment of the command post will require the
appropriation of local utilities such as electric, water and telephone services.
Electric, water and telephone services can often be arranged if the local utilities
are contacted well in advance. Additional charges are incurred if the service
needed is not readily available. These costs will be included in the project
budget. Generators, bottled potable water, and radio communications are
alternatives if the site is so remote that utilities are unavailable, or prove not to
be cost-effective.
Subcontractors may be needed for site inspections. They include well drillers,
geophysical investigators, labor contractors, heavy equipment contractors, etc.
The Office Manager should require subcontractors to sign a subcontractor's
agreement. The subcontractor's agreement delineates the Scope of Work
expected from the subcontractor, the time frame which is expected of the
subcontractor and the cost of the subcontractor's phase. The Project Manager
will expect the subcontractor to meet OSHA standards. If the subcontractor
does not meet OSHA standards, the Project Manager should either consider
another subcontractor or supply the subcontractor with the necessary equipment
to meet the standards. In either case, the Project Manager should expect to
train the subcontractors in the use of the necessary dermal and respiratory
protective equipment needed for the project. The Project Manager must receive
in writing the obligations of the subcontractor regarding safety requirements and
the subcontractor's responsibilities for their phase in the project.
-------
PROJECT
MANAGER
REQUESTS
SAMPLES
PROJECT
MANAGER
REQUESTS
.SAMPLES
COORDINATES
SAMPLES
AND RELAYS
SAMPLE
REQUIREMENTS
REQUESTS
3AMPLES
V"'
OFFICE
SAMPLING
[COORDINATOR
PROCUREMENT OF
SAMPLE SPACE FOR SITE INSPECTIONS
ARRANGES FOR
LABORATORIES
AND RELAYS
CONFIRMATION
OFFICE
SAMPLING
COORDINATOR
NOTIFIES
PROJECT MANAGERS
-------
MOBILIZATION
2.7.4.2.1 General
The Project Manager should reorganize wherever necessary. Plans will
continually change and the Project Manager must be prepared to accept and
deal with the changes.
Changes are more easily handled if the Project Manager plans the project to
allow for changes to take place without the interruption of the rest of the
project. This is accomplished using several planning methods.
1. Do not make plans contingent upon another phase wherever possible.
The domino theory applies to this situation. Should one plan which is a
prerequisite of another fail, then other phases or plans are adversely
affected.
2. Keep procedures simple. Complicated procedures have many intricate
steps subject to breakdowns and malfunctions. The reduction of
intricate steps reduces the possibility of breakdowns and malfunctions.
3. Flexibility in planning. Allow and anticipate changes in plans
throughout the project. Prepare alternative plans and procedures in
case of breakdowns and malfunctions. The more flexible a project is,
the smoother the operation will go.
>+, Allow overkill. Plan for more supplies than you need within budget
constraints. Miscalculations and changes in plans will stress your
inventory. Excess inventory will eliminate project downtime if
circumstances require the Project Manager to change plans.
These steps will help the project run smoothly and prevent costly man-hour
loss due to project downtime that results from unanticipated problems.
2.7.4.2.2 Long Term VS. Short Term
Short term projects will not require the extensive equipment lists, large
budgets, subcontractors and purchasing that are required by long term
projects. However, a greater amount of preplanning and flexibility may be
required for short term projects due to a less tolerant budget, a less variable
equipment list, and a lesser degree of attention that is given to a smaller
project. For these reasons, short term projects are often more difficult to
plan and generally more troublesome to execute.
The decision to treat a project as a large or small one is usually dependent on
the budget and the amount of importance the project demands. The nature of
the project could determine whether establishing a command post is
necessary. The advantages of establishing a command post are:
a) Better communications leading to improved project management.
b) The separation of the clean work zone from contaminated areas, reducing
chemical exposures, and improving worker productivity.
These steps and considerations aid the Project Manager in successfully
mobilizing a project of small or large magnitude.
-------
MOBILIZATION
2.7.4.3 Demobilization
Demobilization from a site involves the completion of work efforts and
departing the site in a manner that will leave all site conditions at their pre-
inspection status.
Unless special arrangements are made, all materials generated from the
decontamination of equipment or personnel should be containerized and taken
off site for disposal.
Appropriate paperwork and log books should be reviewed by the Team
Leader/Project Manager to assure all pertinent information has been
recorded and proper QA sign-offs are complete.
Any chain of custody or sample splitting and documentation should be
reviewed to assure the validity of sample data.
The Team Leader or his representative should meet with the site contact if
present to give notice of their departure, leave receipt of samples and sample
splits if requested, and answer any questions.
2.7.4.3.1 Decontamination
Decontamination is designed to control the spread of contamination to clean
areas by physically removing contaminants and/or converting them
chemically into innocuous substances. How extensive decontamination must
be depends on a number of factors, the most important being the types of
contaminants involved. The more harmful the contaminant, the more
extensive and thorough decontamination must be.
Decontamination methods and equipment needs for each different level of
safety shall be described later in the course. The exact procedure is
determined by the conditions of the particular site and activities that will
occur there. For most site inspections, disposable clothing is bagged or
drummed, left on site or disposed of appropriately. Non-disposal
contaminated tools, equipment, or clothing are either decontaminated with
the appropriate solutions at the site, or containerized and brought away from
the site to be decontaminated later.
2.7.4.3.2 Waste Disposition
The problem of handling and properly disposing of investigation-derived waste
is ongoing. Many questions need to be answered including the following:
1. When is the waste considered hazardous?
2. If we create waste through our field sampling and decontamination
activities are we considered RCRA generators?
3. How do we transport the waste?
4. Where do we store the waste?
5. What mechanisms are in place to dispose of the waste?
-------
EXPENDABLE EQUIPMENT (Confd)
Item
Quantity
Packaged
Amount
Required
MISCELLANEOUS
Aluminum Foil
17# Drums 55 gal.
170 Drums 35 gal.
Kimwipes
pH Paper
Plastic Roll 10' x 25'
Trash Bags O gal.
Vermiculite
500' roll
1 each
1 each
box
2 rolls
1 roll
20 box
1 bag
_£/_
Item
Quantity
Packaged
Amount
Required
WRITE IN:
•Preservatives, calibrating solutions, sample packing materials, and special items of
equipment are the responsibility of the Project Manager.
DEPARTURE DATE:
GROUP MANAGER
-------
NON-EXPENDABLE EQUIPMENT
Equipment Amount Required
CAMERAS
Cannon AE1
Polariod One Step
Polaroid SX70
Camera bag
Binoculars
AIR MONITORING
HNU Photoionization Detector
Draeger Tubes Type ^ £tf -4- t^> £ j. ;
Organic Vapor Analyzer /
OVA Chart Recorder
Explosimeter /
Combination Explosimeter and O2 Indicator
Oxygen Indicator /
Draeger Tube Hand Pump /
H2S Gas Indicator /
Mercury Sniffer
Photovac
METERS
Radiation Mini-Alert
Conductivity Meter
pH Meter
Resistivity Meter (Bison)
Resistivity Meter (Soil Test)
Metal Detector
SURVEYING EQUIPMENT
Optical Rangefinder
Level, Hand 2X
Brunton Transit w/case
Compass
200' Fiberglass Measuring Tape
300' Fiberglass Measuring Tape
-------
NON-EXPENDABLE EQUIPMENT (confd)
Equipment Amount Required
PUMPS AND LIQUID SAMPLING EQUIPMENT
Double Diaphragm Pump 1"
Submersible Pump 1"
Submersible Pump 2"
Pitcher Pump 2"
Bacon Bomb Sampler
Kernmerer Sampler
LG Well Kit Sampler
SM Well Kit Sampler
SS BaiJer
Teflon Bailer
Bottom Filling Bailer
SOIL SAMPLING EQUIPMENT
Spoons Lg
Spoons Sm
Spatula Lg
Spatula Sm
Scoops
Trowel
Large Stainless Steel Bucket
Medium Stainless Steel Bucket
Small Stainless Steel Bucket
Split Spoon Sampler
3" Bucket Auger
3.5" Hand Auger
Dredge
DECON EQUIPMENT
Indian Tank
Heavy Duty Sprayer
John Deer Power Spray w/gas can
50' Sec. Garden Hose
Mop
Lg Hdl Dairy Brushes
SM Hdl Dairy Brushes
Scrub Brushes
Bottle Brushes
'•Vhisk Brushes
\lire Brushes
-------
NON-EXPENDABLE EQUIPMENT (conf d)
Equipment Amount Required
POWER EQUIPMENT
Digger Mobile
3 HP Water Pump w/gas can
Generator w/gas can
Power Auger w/gas can
Extension Cord-Heavy Duty 100"
Extension Cord-Light Duty 25"
Remote Drum Opener
PERSONAL PROTECTION
Hard Hat
Safety Goggles
Safety Glasses
Splash Shield
Full Face Respirator
Respiratory Cartridges
Butyl Rubber Apron
Encapsulated Suits
Life Vests
Rain Jacket
Rain Pants
SELF CONTAINED BREATHING APPARATUS
WlSCBA
Dual Purpose SCBA
CASCADE System
i*5 cu. ft. Composite Tanks
Umbilical Breathing Air Lines (50' Sec)
Umbilical Breathing Air System
330 cu. ft. Class "D" Breathing Air Cylinder
STANDBY SAFETY EQUIPMENT
2Z/f Fire Extinguishers
02 Resuscitator
Stretcher
E-;e \Vash
Trauma Kit
-------
NON-EXPENDABLE EQUIPMENT (conf d)
Equipment Amount Required
HAND TOOLS
Hacksaw
Post Hole Digger
Bung Wrench
Rake
Saw
Ax
Shovel
MISCELLANEOUS
Beeper
Ventilation Smoke Tube Assy.
Isotemp Oven
Wind Speed and Direction Finder
Garbage Can
Clipboard
S3 qt. Ice Chest
40 qt. Ice Chest
Write In:
Departure Date ,3 - ?1
Group Manager ,/. . C, • t~ £ P <-
-------
2
-------
2.7 SITE ACCESS
2.7.1 Introduction
Prior to entering a site a number of key people should be contacted. This section
will describe the reasons why and the procedures to follow in contacting certain
groups. In all cases, the inspector should at least consider whether these
individuals would be interested in knowing if you are going on site. In many cases,
they may aid you in your study. Prior contact may ease your efforts and prevent
any possible future negative repercussions, both legal and political, from having
failed to properly inform affected parties.
The key people can be categorized into four groups:
health and safety support persons
community/neighborhood contacts
municipal, city, county, state, or Federal persons
owner/operator
2.7.2 Health and Safety Support Contacts
These people are discussed in greater detail in Section 4-1 on health and safety.
Briefly, these might include police, emergency medical technicians (ambulance),
hospital staff, firemen, etc., who would help to protect the safety of individuals
working on site.
2.7.3 Community Contacts
It is difficult to remain unobtrusive while conducting site inspections in a
residential area while wearing obtrusive protective clothing such as respirators,
bright protective coveralls, boots and carrying imposing equipment HNU,
radiation detection meters, etc. Considering the increased national awareness of
the hazardous waste problem, the presence of "official looking people" in protec-
tive clothing may alarm residents.
SA-1
-------
EPA CERCLA Cooperative Agreements (CAs) require States to take into consider-
ation community relations when undertaking Fund-supported work. For post-NPL
activities (RI/FS, RD) States are required to have a community relations plan
(CRP) submitted with the funds application. For pre-NPL activities (i.e., PAs, Sis,
SIFs) States are asked to consider community interests prior to undertaking SI field
work. No overall plan is necessary, however, States are required to notify the
appropriate individuals in advance of conducting an SI where community concerns
might arise from the presence of field inspectors. This would most likely occur at
sites located in or near residential areas.
At a minimum, States must assess, as part of their background data collection step,
whether some level of controversy exists or is likely to develop due to SI activities.
State community relations coordinators (if they exist) and EPA regional community
relations coordinators may be helpful in providing starting points and contacts.
If after assessing the possibility of controversy, the State decides there may be
local interest, the State should identify appropriate contacts to call or visit. The
discussion should remain as factual as possible, avoiding opinions or raising
expectations for future action. The contact should clearly understand that the
agency conducting the inspection does not know if there is a problem but is
attempting to look into the problem. The State should:
explain the purpose of the activity
identify the location of the site
explain the tasks to be performed
identify a contact for further information
The local contact should be asked if there are other possible interested parties,
whether an additional meeting should be held or flyers distributed, and if the
contact is interested in receiving results of the SI.
After the meeting, State staff should write up a summary of the discussion as soon
as possible for future references. Staff should prepare a final list of all interested
officials and citizens with pertinent titles and affiliations, addresses, and phone
SA-2
-------
numbers. The list will be included in any subsequent Community Relations plan for
the site.
In no situation, should an inspector arrive at the door of a 3rd party local resident
seeking access to their property to take samples, (especially wearing protective
clothing) without prior contact.
The following person is your EPA Regional Community Relations coordinator:
2.7.* Municipal/County/State/Federal Contacts
Prior to initiating field work for an SI, it is advisable to contact local health
department officials, other local affected agencies, and affected Federal agencies.
These groups are a resource for information on site practices, site history, site
compliance records, etc. Often they will have knowledge of other investigations or
enforcement activities that could potentially conflict with the SI or could affect
their enforcement efforts. Where appropriate, the interferences should be
minimized. Ongoing efforts by other agencies in and of itself are not sufficient
reason to cancel or postpone an inspection but where adjustments can be made,
without compromising the health and safety of the public or the environment, these
should at least be considered.
2.7.5 Owner/Operator
Overview
Site inspections (Sis) are influenced by a variety of legal concerns that must be
appreciated from the outset. Although an inspection may be authorized by any
number of federal or state statutes, there are overall constitutional, statutory, and
evidentiary legal requirements that define the broad procedural limits of each
phase of an investigation. An inspector always must be aware that the primary
SA-3
-------
function is to gather accurate data in accordance with the fundamental principles
of law, so as to:
Insure that the data gathered can be used effectively in enforcement
proceedings,
Protect the rights of the inspected party and third parties and minimize
the inspector's potential liability, and
Minimize the risk to affected third parties.
Unless legal concerns are properly respected, the accuracy of inspection data may
be rendered suspect, the safety of third parties may be jeopardized, data may be
excluded from legal proceedings on evidentiary grounds, and the inspector may
leave him- or herself open to criminal and civil penalties as well as potential third-
party liability.
2.7.5.1 Site Access
The owner, operator, or person in charge of a site (hereinafter, the owner) does not
have an absolute right to control who enters his or her property. The site owner
must submit to an inspection by authorized governmental representatives but he or
she is entitled to insist that the entry on his or her premises be made in accordance
with accepted legal procedures. The site owner has the right either to consent to
an inspection or to refuse to allow the inspector to enter his or her premises
without a proper warrant.
2.7.5.2 Consensual Entry
The inspector should attempt to obtain the consent of the agent in charge of the
site before seeking a warrant. Guidelines governing consensual entry are outlined
below.
-------
Gaining owner/operator consent by advance notification is recommended for most
all site inspections. CERCLA does not specifically require obtaining advance
consent but in most situations it is generally appropriate (e.g., where the owner's
representative is not at the site). Advance consent should be followed-up with a
written notification. The person notifying the owner/operator should inform them
of the types of activities to be conducted (samples collected, pictures taken, visual
observation, etc.). The notifier should also advise the site owner of his or her right
to split samples and to prepare containers if sample splitting will occur. The
CERCLA requirement for offering split samples and receipts should take
precedence over individual state laws if the state is operating with Federal funds.
In cases where ownership of an abandoned site cannot be determined or notice of
any sort is impossible, the need for obtaining a warrant should be discussed with
counsel. Advance notification may not be appropriate in situations where the
inspectors anticipate destruction of evidence (see discussion on consensual entry).
The inspector must avoid even the appearance of coercing the owner to consent to
his or her entry. An entry will be considered voluntary—even if the owner
complains or otherwise expresses his or her displeasure with the regulatory
inspection—as long as the owner allows the inspector to enter the premises. If, on
the other hand, the inspector has gained entry by offering a verbal or physical
threat, the entry ultimately may be determined to be invalid, and any information
obtained during the inspection could be suppressed at trial.
When the inspectors arrive at the site, they should always present their credentials
and inform the owner/operator or designee of the nature of the work and the
authority for conducting the SI.
The owner may withdraw his or her consent at any time. Withdrawal of consent is
equivalent to refused entry. A warrant should be secured to complete the
inspection. However, any information gathered before the withdrawal of consent,
including samples and photographs, can be used in a legal proceeding. Likewise,
any information obtained while an inspector is in an area open to the public is
admissible in a legal proceeding. This "plain view" theory has its limits, however.
SA-5
-------
Any mechanical aids—such as binoculars, detection equipment, telephoto lenses,
aerial photography, etc.—used by the inspector either in an area open to the public
or after consent has been withdrawn, may result in the suppression of such
information at trial.
The person giving the consent should be presented with a statement to sign
acknowledging the owner's consent. The statement should be retained by the
inspector and included in the inspection report as documentation of the consent
given.
Consent may be given with conditions. In general this should be avoided. However,
if the conditions do not significantly interfere with the conduct of the SI, the
inspectors may chose to proceed. Any conditions then must be accurately noted in
the log book. For example, the owner may limit the places where inspectors can go
or employees with whom to interview, or the owner of a facility may require the
inspectors to sign hold-harmless agreements and confidentiality agreements as a
prerequisite to entry. Although the legal validity of hold-harmless agreements is
doubtful, in most cases the inspector should not sign such agreements. State
employees should consult with their lawyers and/or the region to determine
whether such agreements are justified or should be treated as a refusal of entry.
Before visiting the site, the inspector should be informed about which conditional
consent entry guidelines are to be followed. As an alternative, the inspector should
refuse to sign anything, even the visitor's log, and offer instead a blank sheet of
paper with entry/exit times or, a previously prepared statement that contains the
following information:
Inspector's name, title, and employer;
Physical description;
Some form of identification (driver's license, ID card);
Brief general description of the activities to be conducted at the site;
and
Entry/exit times.
SA-6
-------
The inspector may have to consider obtaining a warrant if the owner/operator
limits the inspection to the point that it prevents the inspectors from obtaining
important information.
2.7.5.3 Nonconsensual Entry
If consent cannot be obtained or is withdrawn, the inspector should seek a warrant
to obtain entry. The inspection must be conducted strictly in accordance with the
warrant. If the warrant restricts the inspection to certain areas of the premises or
certain records, those restrictions must be adhered to. Failure to adhere strictly
to the applicable limitations on the scope of an inspection could jeopardize the
admissibility of information obtained during an inspection.
When an inspector is refused entry, he or she should note the identity of the person
refusing entry, the date and time of refusal, the reasons given for refusal, and
other pertinent details. He or she should then leave the premises and immediately
notify his or her manager and the appropriate agency attorney to obtain a warrant.
2.7.5.4 Warrantless Entry
If an emergency exists or there is no time to obtain a warrant and owner consent
cannot be obtained, a warrantless inspection is permissible. This would include
situations where there is a potential for destruction of evidence or where evidence
of a suspected violation may disappear during the time that it takes to obtain a
warrant.
Similarly, some courts have held that inspections under the Federal Insecticide,
Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA) and the Toxic Substances Control Act
(TSCA) involving industries that are highly regulated are not subject to warrant
requirements. Inspectors should consult with counsel before entering a site without
consent and without a warrant. Inspectors should consider requesting assistance or
backup from local police in this event.
SA-7
-------
2.7.6 Other Issues
2.7.6.1 Limitations of Inspection
All inspections are limited in their scope by the statute. CERCLA
specifies that the inspector is empowered only to:
enter specified establishments at "reasonable times"
commence and complete with reasonable promptness to inspect and
obtain samples of wastes, substances, containers, or labeling.
The scope of the inspection in a consensual situation may be limited by the consent
of the site owner. The owner's ability to withdraw or place limits on the scope of a
consensual inspection at any time can narrow significantly the scope of any
inspection. Finally, an inspection undertaken with a warrant (nonconsensual) is
controlled by the terms of the warrant.
2.7.6.2 Use of Contractors as Inspectors
Each of the various acts authorizing regulatory inspections sets forth specific
restrictions governing the use of contractors to government agencies. Although
CERCLA allows for use of contractors to conduct inspections (CERCLA 104(e)(l)
and (f)), other acts are not as clear and will continue to be the focus of litigation.
Any contractor conducting inspections should clearly announce his or her contrac-
tor status and corporate affiliation when identifying him- or herself and should
display appropriate credentials verifying his or her designation as an authorized
representative. The agency employing the contractors should also be prepared to
send state personnel to a site if the owner expresses reservations about allowing a
contractor onto a site.
Where the inspector is a private contractor, his or her employer should provide
adequate information on the health hazards of working with hazardous substances.
Similarly, Section 104(f) and (g) of CERCLA requires contractors funded under
-------
CERCLA cooperative agreements to comply with federal health and safety
standards and pay minimum wage.
In addition to possible criminal and civil penalties imposed by OSHA for violation
of Federal Health and Safety laws, common law theories of gross negligence are
likely to be applicable to an employer's failure to properly inform and protect his
employees, and potential liability to private employers and government agencies is
great.
2.7.6.3 Walk-Around Right of Owner
The question frequently arises about the extent to which the site owner may
accompany an inspector as he or she reviews operations, interviews employees, and
so on.
Every reasonable effort should be made to afford walk-around rights to the site
owner. If multiple work sites are involved, it may be appropriate for one or more
owner representatives to accompany the inspectors. However, the inspector may
deny right of accompaniment to any person whose conduct interferes with a full
and orderly inspection or poses any threat to the health and safety of the
inspectors.
Site employee representatives can provide valuable information to the inspector,
but care should be taken to insure that the employees contacted are knowledge-
able, e.g., designated union representative, safety committee representative, or
person familiar with the operations in question. In the case of an inspection where
health concerns are paramount, the inspector may wish to have an employee
representative accompany him during portions of the inspection. Avoid use of
people who have "axes to grind".
If data are sought from an area where trade secret information is maintained, the
inspector should ascertain from the site owner whether any accompanying
employee representative is authorized to enter the area. Similarly, if the
information sought has been declared classified by a federal government agency in
SA-9
-------
the interests of national security, only persons authorized to have access to such
information may accompany the inspector.
2.7.6.14- Confidentiality
States are strongly encouraged to avoid accepting data that requires confidential
treatment. If the owner insists on the confidentiality of data, states should have
their attorneys evaluate whether their data qualifies under State and Federal laws
and regulations for confidential treatment. It is extremely difficult to deal with
confidential data if the site is ever listed on the NPL. Plus, it is an incredible
burden to store and control confidential data. Under CERCLA 104(e)(2) and USC
Title IS, Section 1905, the owner of a hazardous substance facility has certain
legally recognized rights to "trade secret" and "confidential" information which the
inspector must be aware of and protect. Failure to do so can result in criminal
penalties against the inspector and civil suits against governmental agencies. Site
inspectors should be thoroughly knowledgeable of the specific regulations of their
agency as well as state and federal regulations if you are ever going to deal with
this type of information.
Confidentiality/disclosure regulations provide that the owner of confidential infor-
mation has the right to assert a claim of confidentiality. An inspector gathering
information by consent of the owner or by warrant must recognize that such a
claim may be asserted by the owner at any time. If an inspector is confronted with
such a claim, he should adhere to the guidelines described below.
First, the assertions of confidential claims may be accompanied by the withdrawal
of consent to inspect certain areas. Such limitations on the scope of the inspection
should be noted in the log book. Further inspection of information for which
consent has been withdrawn can only be conducted pursuant to a warrant.
Second, if the owner/operator asserts confidential claims on information
authorized for gathering under a warrant or if the owner/operator asks for
confidential treatment but does not withdraw consent, the inspector may continue
to gather information as long as procedures governing confidential treatment of
SA-10
-------
information are followed. For example, such procedures may require that all
information claimed to be confidential, including photographic prints or negatives
and environmental samples, be labeled confidential, be maintained in locked
segregated files, and not be disclosed except in accordance with established
procedures.
In a situation where a confidential claim is asserted, the inspector should advise
the owner/operator that CERCLA 104(e)(2)(c) specifies that the owner must
designate the confidential material in writing, and therefore the owner must
follow-up the verbal request in writing immediately. The letter must identify
material which is entitled to business confidential treatment
reason to substantiate claim referencing appropriate legal authority.
EPA regulations governing treatment and handling of confidential data are
delineated in 40 CFR Part 2, Subpart B, Sections 2.201-2.309 (41 FR 36902,
September 1, 1976; amended 43 FR 39997 September 8, 1978).
5A-11
-------
g, <}
-------
2.9 SAMPLING
2.9.1 INTRODUCTION
Sound conduct of sampling is the next most important
factor in ensuring that the data gathered can be used effec-
tively in enforcement proceeding - next to proper site
access procedures. It is possible that the data gathered
will provide the basis for future legal actions, including:
0 State Enforcement
0 EPA/NPL Listing
0 EPA Enforcement/CERCLA
There are two major areas where the admissibility/
integrity of sampling can be compromised. The following
sections discuss these considerations in greater detail.
2.9.2 TECHNICALLY SOUND SAMPLING
Defendants may be able to challenge the integrity of
analytical results used against them if technically sound
sampling is not used. Error and bias can be introduced in a
host of ways if inspectors are not properly versed in correct
procedures.
SOP' s
The first way to reduce the likelihood of error is
establishing Standard Operating Procedures (SOP's). SOP's
should be established covering all sampling activities.
SOP's should be developed for each sampling devise, each
instrument, and tailored to as many generic situation as
routinely addressed. For example, procedures for collecting
surface water samples may vary depending upon whether the
sample is collected from a turbulent stream or a relatively
stagnant lagoon or lake.
Where non-routine situations are confronted and
deviation from established SOP's are made, notation of this
should be made in the field log book.
More detailed discussion on the content and scope of
SOP's was discussed earlier.
SAMPLE QA
Once analytical data are received from the laboratory,
the results and backup QA data must be reviewed to ensure that
conclusions reached about the nature of contamination are
legitimate. Past experience, has taught the value of reviewing
-------
-2-
the analytical data before making the raw data available.
On the other hand seemingly "poor" analytical results may
still be viable, if only qualitatively, as long as it clearly
understood how error was introduced in the result and what are
the limitation of the results.
GOOD FIELD TECHNIQUE
Sound SOP's and analysis cannot make up for poor field
technique. SOP's are good only if they are followed.
Proper field technique should never compromised due to
inconvience.
2.9.3 PROCEDURALLY SOUND SAMPLING
Analytical data may be determined to be inadmissible in
court or considered unvalid if improper procedures are followed
regardless of whether the analytical results are sound.
CERCLA REQUIREMENTS
CERCLA 104(e)(l) requires an inspector, upon leaving
the premises, to offer the owner/operator
0 a receipt of sample results, and
° an equal portion of samples
From a practical perspective, the inspector should ask
the owner/operator in advance of entering the site if he/she
wants splits of samples rather than waiting until exiting the
site. Typically, the owner/operator should provide their
own sample bottles. In some unusual situations, it might be
appropriate for the inspector to provide the bottles for the
split samples. The owner/operator should be instructed to
be sure their sample bottles are properly cleaned. It is
advisable to bring an extra set of sample bottles in the
event of any unusual developments. Owners/operators sometimes
change their minds at the last minute and decide they want
split samples. If this occurs, you may have to oblige.
If the owner/operator declines a split of the samples,
log this in your field logbook and have owner sign log book
or a document declining splits.
CERCLA 104(e)(l) also requires an inspector to provide
the owner/operator with the results of the sample analyses,
promptly. Analytical data is not "official" until it has
passed through a quality assurance check.
-------
-3-
CHAIN-OF-CUSTODY
The purpose of chain-of-custody is to trace the
possession of a sample from the time of collection, until
it or the derived data is introduced as evidence in legal
proceedings. Custody records should, therefore, trace a
sample from its collection, through all transfers of custody,
until it is delivered to the analytical laboratory. At this
point, internal laboratory records should document sample
custody until its final disposition.
Since it may not always be possible to know ahead of
time if a sample will be used as evidence in future legal
actions, it is a good common sense to institute chain-of-
custody in all instances. Use of such SOP practices on a
project-to-project basis will contribute to the consistency
and quality of the generated data.
Chain-of-custody involves (1) proper assignment of
unique sample identification numbers, (2) use of sample
tracking, chain-of-custody forms in the field, (3) use of
custody seals, (4) documentation of sample locations numbers
or other relevant notations in field logbook or sample
receipt forms, and (5) use of chain-of-custody forms in
laboratories. Each of these are discussed in greater detail
in the following sections.
Sample Identification
Preprinted, preserialized sample collection tags
are necessary to identify samples collected for shipment to
the analytical laboratory. Specific analysis tags may also
be issued by the analytical laboratory after the sample has
arrived. Each sample should be identified with a unique
project and sample number to clearly distinguish the sample
from others collected at the site and other projects. For
each sample collected, including duplicates and field blanks,
a sample tag should be completely filled in with waterproof
ink. The tags should cover a minimum of the following
informat ion:
0 Project Code
0 Location Number
0 Date of Collection
0 Time of Collection
0 Location Description
0 Signature of Sampler
0 Remarks
-------
-4-
See Figure 1 on page 6 for an example of an appropriate
sample collection tag. The remarks are located on the back
side of the tag.
The source from which the sample is collected shall be
clearly marked in such a way to maintain traceability. The
exact location of each sample shall be recorded in the
logbook and documented on a site map.
After sample analysis and appropriate quality assurance
checks have been make, original sample collection tags are
to be stored in a document file. Maintaining such files and
records is an important aspect of sample traceability and
provides a needed cross referencing tool that can be used
to correlate any one of the identifying numbers and sources
(e.g., collection tag, laboratory number, master log, etc.)
with a specific sample.
Chain-of-Custody Forms
There are many transfers of custody during the course
of a sampling program, from time of collection through final
sample disposition, and all samples should be accompanied by
a Chain-of-Custody Record to document these transfers. See
Figure 2 on page 7 for an example form.
The custody records are used for a packaged lot of
samples (cooler); more that one sample will usually be
recorded on one form. More than one custody record sheet
may be used for one package, if necessary. Their purpose is
to document the transfer of a group of samples traveling
together; when the group of samples changes, a new custody
record is initiated. The original of the custody record
always travels with the samples.
In general, the following procedures should be followed
when using the custody record sheets.
° The originator fills in all requested information
form the sample tags (except in the case of air collec-
tion media and external QC samples which will be
accompanied by custody forms from the originating
facility). Always use water proof ink.
0 The person receiving custody checks the sample tag
information against the custody record. He also checks
sample condition and notes anything unusual under
"Remarks" on the custody form.
-------
-5-
0 The orginator signs in the to left "Relinquished by"
box and keeps the copy.
° The final person receiving custody signs in the
adjacent "Received by" box and keeps the orginal.
° The Date/Time will be the same for both signatures
since custody must be transferred to another person.
° When custody is transferred to the Sample Bank or an
analytical laboratory, there may be blank signature
spaces left. If this occurs a line should be drawn
through unused signature boxes as is done for a
personal check.
0 In all cases, it must be readily seen that the same
person receiving custody has relinquished it to the
next custodian.
0 If samples are left unattended or a person refuses
to sign, this should be documented and explained on
the custody record.
Custody Seals
Custody seals are narrow strips of adhesive paper used
to demonstrate that no tampering has occurred. They may be
used on sampling equipment or a well head (temporarily) ,
but they are intended for use on a sample transport container
which is not secured by a padlock. They are generally not
intended for use on individual sample containers.
Receipt for Samples Form
When is becomes necessary to split samples with another
party, a separate receipt for samples form is prepared and
marked to indicate with whom the samples have been split.
The signature of the person receiving the split is required
and if this person refuses to sign, it should be noted in
the "Received by" space.
This form complies with the requirements of both CERCLA
104(e) and RCRA 3007(a)(2). A copy of the completed form
should be given to the person receiving the split samples
one of the above described individuals, even if the offer
for split samples is declined. See Figure 3 on page 7 for
an example receipt form.
Laboratory Custody Procedures
State laboratories or State contract laboratories must
have a designated sample custodian who implements a system
-------
-6-
to maintain control of the samples. This includes accepting
custody of arriving samples, verifying that information on
the sample tags match the chain-of-custody record, assigning
unique laboratory numbers and laboratory sample tags and
distributing the samples to the analysts.
The designated custodian is also responsible for retaining
all original identifying tags, data sheets and laboratory
records and retaining them in a permanent file or returning
them to the project leader/inspector for filing.
Questions/Problems Concerning Custody Records
If a discrepancy between sample tag numbers and custody
record listings is found, the person receiving custody should
document this and properly store the samples. It is recommended
that the discrepancy be resolved before analyzing the samples
and using precious lab space and funds.
The responsible person receiving custody should attempt
to resolve the problem by checking all available information
(other markings on sample container, type of sample, etc.).
He/She should then document the situation on the custody
record an in the project logbook and notify the project QA
Manager promptly.
-------
-7-
Figure 1.
Sample Tag
N 1000
CurtraM Oi|.
COO.TOC
• Hj.0fl.il
Mimu. Nioia
-------
CHAIN OF CUSTODY RECORD
iPHOJtCTNAUt
Figure 2. - Chain-of-Cus'tod^ Form
Figure 3, - Receipt of Sample Form
ftECIIFT FON 1AMKCI
L-i-
349
-------
CUSTODY SEAL
Signature
Example of EPA Chain-of-Cuatody Seal
-------
S/
re
-------
2.10 SITE INSPECTION-FINAL REPORT
2.10.1 INTRODUCTION
The guidance governing preliminary assessments and site
insections performed by States under EPA cooperative
agreements requires States to submit the following documents
as part of the final SI. These components are:
° Narrative SI Report
0 2070-13 Form
Depending upon the workplan negotiated between the State
and EPA, some States will be required to submit one
additional component:
0 HRS score package (score sheets, documentation
record, attachments)
It is important to note that the 2070-13 Form will be
replaced by a form which will in effect merge the 2070-13
and HRS documentation form. When this form becomes available.
States will be asked to complete this form in place of the
2070-13 form.
2.10.2 NARRATIVE SITE INSPECTION REPORT
The following is the recommended outline for the site
inspection narrative report. States may adjust the
outline as appropriate, however, the information identified
below should be presented in whatever format the State
uses.
0 Summary
° Site Background
0 Environmental Setting
0 Site Map, Photographs, Sketches
0 Waste Characteristics
0 Laboratory Results
0 Toxicological Characteristics
-------
0 Conclusions and Recommendations
0 Bibliography
0 Appendices
2.10.3 FILES
The State must retain a file of non-reference documents
compiled and used in preparing the final site inspection
report. This report will eventually serve as the basis
for substantiating work under the site inspection. If the
site is eventually listed on the NPL, the file will also
become, by reference, background for the official
administrative record for the EPA. If the site is to
withstand any possible administrative and technical challenges
by the .responsible party it is important that the file be
complete and well organized. The file will also serve as
the basis for substantiating State work in the event of a
grant audit. Although frequently different individuals
maintain a personal file it is important to have one file
which consolidates copies all of background documents.
The file should contain but not be limited to:
0 Background Reports
0 Memorandums
0 Workplan/Sampling Plan
0 Records of Communication
0 Maps
° Photographs
0 Field Log Books
0 Laboratory Reports
0 Sample tapes, Chain-of-Custody Forms, etc.
-------
OP
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE
OF ANALYTICAL DATA
2.11.1 PURPOSE
The Quality Assurance of data is performed to assure the reliability of all data
generated from sampling efforts and any related field activity.
2.11.2 APPLICABILITY
The Quality Assurance of data is necessary to ensure that only accurate,
reliable, and valid data is used in the generation of reports and deliverables,
including the Hazardous Ranking System (HRS) Model.
2.11.3 DEFINITIONS
Quality Assurance the total integrated program for assuring the reliability of
monitoring and measurement data.
DISCUSSION
To understand the concepts of why data is Quality Assured, it is helpful to
understand the process by which such data is generated, from the initial
sampling effort to the time it is incorporated into final reports, including the
HRS Model.
The flow diagram presented as Figure 2.11-1 tracks a normal set of samples
from the initial sampling effort to resulting final use as Quality Assured
generated data for incorporation into the HRS Model.
Though each individual state office may follow their own office specific routing
system for the Quality Assurance of data, this example provides the general
procedure by which data should be processed before it can be considered valid.
2.11.5 RESPONSIBILITIES
The responsibility for the procurement, review, and Quality Assurance of data
is shared jointly by the sampling team, the State Office Data Coordinator, and
the State Office Quality Assurance Division.
2.11.6 PROCEDURES
The following summarizes the major procedures used in the overall scheme of
data Quality Assurance once the State Office has initially received a data
package.
\t first, a Preliminary Data Review is conducted on the data package. This can
be done by a member of the sampling team familiar with laboratory and data
reporting procedures.
-------
PROPER PACKAGING AND
CHAIN OF CUSTODY
STATE OFFICE
DATA COORDINATOR
:
MISSING DATA
FORWARDED
CALLS FOR
MISSING DATA
ANALYZES SAMPLES AND
REPORTS RESULTS
DATA TO STATE FOR
PRELIMINARY DATA REVIEW
COMPLETES PRELIMINARY
DATA REVIEW
STATE OFFICE
DATA COORDINATOR
STATE OFFICE
DATA COORDINATOR
COMPLETED
DATA PACKAGE
IF NO MISSING DATA,
| COMPLETED DATA PACKAGE
STATE OFFICE
QA DIVISION
STATE OFFICE
DATA COORDINATOR
QUALITY ASSURES DATA
SENDS DATA TO SAMPLING
TEAM PROJECT MANAGER
COMPLETES HRS MODEL
STATE OFFICE
DATA COORDINATOR
QUALITY ASSURANCE OF ANALYTICAL DATA
FIGURE 2.11-1
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE
OF ANALYTICAL DATA
The scope of the Preliminary Data Review should include:
U Ensuring that all deiiverables set forth in the laboratory contract are included
within the data package.
2) Checking that the completeness of the forms is acceptable within the scope of
the contract.
3) "Flagging"certain data within the package which falls outside the acceptance
criteria range.
>+) Complete a checklist of questions which summarize and present key items in
the data package (See example on following pages)
5) Deliver data package, checklist, and a list of missing documents to the State
Office Data Coordinator.
It is the responsibility of the Data Coordinator to review the checklist and list of
missing documents and then contact the laboratory to secure such documents. The
Data Coordinator then delivers the data package, and if necessary, any missing
documents forwarded by the laboratory, to the Quality Assurance Division of the
State Office.
The Quality Assurance Division performs the actual qualitative analysis of the
data. Based upon the sampling results in the data package, the information
presented from the Preliminary Data Review, and their own expertise, they either
accept or reject various components of the data package. This function performed
by the Quality Assurance Division is generally the most intensive part of the Data
Quality Assurance process.
2.11.7 RECORDS
The data package itself serves as a record of what data are accepted or rejected by
the Quality Assurance Division.
-------
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW
OF CONTRACT LABORATORY PROGRAM ORGANICS DATA
Revision 5
1/24/85
Site Name:
Case // and/or SAS // :
CLP Laboratory:
Contract // :
CLP Data Received from Laboratory on:
Preliminary Review completed on:
Laboratory contacted about Missing Information on:
Supplemental Information received from Laboratory on:
Preliminary Reviewed Data submitted
to the Monitoring Management Branch on:
Preliminary Reviewer:
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
1.0 Cover Letter
1.1 Is the Narrative or Cover Letter present?
1.2 Are the following items contained in the Narrative
or Cover Letter:
a. Case Number and/or SAS Number
b. Contract Number
2.0 GC Screen Data (Optional)
2.1 Is the GC Screen Data Sheet present?
(See Attachment 2.1)
2.2 Are all the sample numbers listed on the GC Screen
Data Sheet?
2.3 Are the GC Screen Chromatograms present for the
samples and blanks? If no, please list the missing
Chromatograms below.
Missing Chromatograms:
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
3.0 Organic Analysis Data
3.1 Are the four W Organic Analysis Data Sheets (VOA,
BNA, Pesticides and Tentatively Identified Compounds)
present for each of the following. (See Attachment
3.1) If no, please list the missing Data Sheets below.
a. Samples and/or fractions as appropriate
b. Matrix spikes and matrix spike duplicates
c. Blanks
Missing Data Sheets:
VOA:
BNA:
Pesticides:
TIC:
3.2 Are the Reconstructed Ion Chromatograms for each sample,
the mass spectra for the identified compounds, and the
Data System Printouts (Quant, list) included in the
sample package for each of the following. If not, please
list the missing Reconstructed Ion Chromatograms,
mass spectra, and Data System printouts below
a. Samples and/or fractions as appropriate
b. Matrix spikes and matrix spike duplicates
(Mass spectra not required)
c. Blanks
Missing Reconstructed Ion Chromatograms and Data System Printouts:
Missing Mass Spectra:_
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANIC DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
3.3 Are the mass spectra for the standards present for
compounds identified in the samples?
Missing Mass Spectra:
Are the mass spectra for the tentatively identified
compounds and associated "best match" spectra
included in the sample package for each of the
following. If no, please list the missing numbers
below.
a. Samples and/or fractions as appropriate
b. Matrix spikes and matrix spike duplicates
(Mass Spectra not required)
c. Blanks
Missing Mass Spectra:
4.0 Surrogate Percent Recovery Summaries
4.1 Are the Surrogate Percent Recovery Summaries present
for each of the following matrix:
a. Water (See Attachment 4.1) _
b. Soil (See Attachment 4.2) _
4.2 Are all the samples listed on the Surrogate Percent
Recovery Summaries for each of the following matrix:
a. Water (See Attachment 4.1) _
b. Soil (See Attachment 4.2)
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
4.3 Are the surrogate percent recoveries listed for all
the blanks?
4.4 Are all the water data within the specified limits
presented in Attachment 4.1 for the following parameters:
(Please circle the outliers in red.)
a. Volatiles
b. Semi-Volatiles
c. Pesticides
4.5 Are all the soil data within the specified limits
presented in Attachment 4.2 for the following
parameters: (Please circle the outliers in red.)
a. Volatiles
b. Semi-Volatiles
c. Pesticides
5.0 Reagent Blank Summary
5.1 Is the Reagent Blank Summary present?
(See Attachment 5.1)
5.2 Is there at least one blank listed on the Reagent
31ank Summary for every twenty (20) samples?
6.0 Matrix Spike Duplicate/Recovery Form
6.1 Is the Matrix Spike Duplicate/Recovery Form present?
(See Attachment 6.1)
6.2 Is there one duplicate listed on the Matrix Spike
Duplicate/ Recovery Form for every twenty (20)
samples?
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
7.0 GC/MS Tuning and Mass Calibration Forms
7.1 Are the GC/MS Tuning and Mass Calibration forms present
for the following:
a. Bromofluorobenzene (BFB)
(See Attachment 7.1)
b. Decafluorotriphenylphosphine (DFTPP)
(See Attachment 7.2)
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA
7.2 List the time and date that the Volatile fractions were run below:
Sample Number
Instrument
Time
Date
7.3 List the time and date that the BFB samples were run below:
Instrument
Time
Date
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA
7.4 List the time and date that the Semi-Volatile fractions were run below:
Sample Number
Instrument
Time
Date
7.5 List the time and date that the DFTPP samples were run below:
Instrument
Time
Date
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
7.6 Are the bar graph spectrum and mass/charge (m/z)
listings for the BFB provided for each twelve (12)
hour shift? If no, please list the missing spectrum
and listings below.
Missing spectrum and listings:
7.7 Are the bar graph spectrum and mass/charge (m/z)
listings for the DFTPP provided for each twelve (12)
hour shift? In no, please list the missing
spectrum and listings below.
Missing spectrum and listings:
7.8 Is the Cross Reference Table present
(Refer to Attachments 7.1 and 7.2)
3.0 Instrument Tune and Performance Summary (Optional)
8.1 Is the Instrument Tune and Performance Summary
present? (See Attachment 8.1)
8.2 Are the BFB and DFTPP Performance Results found
within the specified criteria presented in
Attachment 8.1?
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
9.0 Initial Calibration Data Sheets
9.1 Are the Initial Calibration Data Sheets present and
completely filled out for all compounds for the
following fractions:
a. Semi-Volatiles (See Attachment 9.1)
b. Volatiles (See Attachment 9.2)
9.2 Are the semi-volatile data within the specified
limits presented in Attachment 9.1?
(Please circle outliers in red.)
9.3 Are the volatile data within the specified limits
presented in Attachment 9.2?
(Please circle outliers in red.)
10.0 Calibration Check Sheets
10.1 Are the Calibration Check Sheets present and
completely filled out for all compounds for
the following fractions:
a. Semi-Volatiles (See Attachment 10.1)
b. Volatiles (See Attachment 10.2)
10.2 Are the semi-volatile data within the specified
limits presented in Attachment 10.1?
(Please circle outliers in red.)
10.3 Are the volatile data within the specified limits
presented in Attachment 10.2?
(Please circle outliers in red.)
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
11.0 Standards Data Package
11.2 Are the Reconstructed Ion Chromatograms, Data System
Printouts (Quant, list), and work sheet calculations
present for the following:
a. Samples
b. Blanks _
c. Matrix spikes
d. Matrix spike duplicates
11.3 Are the Gas Chromatograms and Data System Printout
present for the following:
a. Pesticide Standard _
b. PCS Standard
10
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA
11.4 List the times and dates that the Pesticide/PCB samples were run,
if the laboratory has not summarized them in a table.
Sample Number
Instrument
Time
Date
11.5 List the times and dates that the Pesticide/PCB Standards were run,
if the laboratory has not summarized them in a table.
Instrument
Time
Date
11
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
12.0 Detection Limits
12.1 Is the list of currently calculated detection
limits present? (The limits should not be the
same for all of the parameters.)
13.0 Package Copies
13.1 Are all the xeroxing of readable quality?
12
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA
14.0 Reagent Blank Chronology
14.1 List the time and date that a reagent blank or instrument blank
was run on instrument for each of the fractions listed below:
Sample Number
VOAs
Instrument
Time
BNAs
Pesticides/PCBS
Date
13
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGAN1CS DATA (cont'd)
Review Criteria Supplemental Information Table
Review Criteria
Sample
Number
Instument
Time
Date
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE
OF ANALYTICAL DATA
2.11.1 PURPOSE
The Quality Assurance of data is performed to assure the reliability of all data
generated from sampling efforts and any related field activity.
2.11.2 APPLICABILITY
The Quality Assurance of data is necessary to ensure that only accurate,
reliable, and valid data is used in the generation of reports and deliverables,
including the Hazardous Ranking System (MRS) Model.
2.11.3 DEFINITIONS
Quality Assurance the total integrated program for assuring the reliability of
monitoring and measurement data.
2.11.4 DISCUSSION
To understand the concepts of why data is Quality Assured, it is helpful to
understand the process by which such data is generated, from the initial
sampling effort to the time it is incorporated into final reports, including the
MRS Model.
The flow diagram presented as Figure 2.11-1 tracks a normal set of samples
from the initial sampling effort to resulting final use as Quality Assured
generated data for incorporation into the MRS Model.
Though each individual state office may follow their own office specific routing
system for the Quality Assurance of data, this example provides the general
procedure by which data should be processed before it can be considered valid.
2.11.5 RESPONSIBILITIES
The responsibility for the procurement, review, and Quality Assurance of data
is shared jointly by the sampling team, the State Office Data Coordinator, and
the State Office Quality Assurance Division.
2.11.6 PROCEDURES
The following summarizes the major procedures used in the overall scheme of
data Quality Assurance once the State Office has initially received a data
package.
At first, a Preliminary Data Review is conducted on the data package. This can
be done by a member of the sampling team familiar with laboratory and data
reporting procedures.
-------
PROPER PACKAGING AND
CHAIN OF CUSTODY
STATE OFFICE
DATA COORDINATOR
CALLS FOR
MISSING DATA
ANALYZES SAMPLES AND
REPORTS RESULTS
DATA TO STATE FOR
PRELIMINARY DATA REVIEW
COMPLETES PRELIMINARY
DATA REVIEW
STATE OFFICE
DATA COORDINATOR
MISSING DATA |
FORWARDED !
STATE OFFICE
HATA COORDINATOR
COMPLETED
DATA PACKAGE
IF NO MISSING DATA.
COMPLETED DATA PACKAGE
STATE OFFICE
QA DIVISION
STATE OFFICE
DATA COORDINATOR
QUALITY ASSURES DATA
SENDS DATA TO SAMPLING
TEAM PROJECT MANAGER
COMPLETES MRS MODEL
STATE OFFICE
DATA COORDINATOR
QUALITY ASSURANCE OF ANALYTICAL DATA
FIGURE 2.11-1
-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE
OF ANALYTICAL DATA
The scope of the Preliminary Data Review should include:
U Ensuring that all deliverables set forth in the laboratory contract are included
within the data package.
2) Checking that the completeness of the forms is acceptable within the scope of
the contract.
3) "Flagging"certain data within the package which falls outside the acceptance
criteria range.
k) Complete a checklist of questions which summarize and present key items in
the data package (See example on following pages)
5) Deliver data package, checklist, and a list of missing documents to the State
Office Data Coordinator.
It is the responsibility of the Data Coordinator to review the checklist and list of
missing documents and then contact the laboratory to secure such documents. The
Data Coordinator then delivers the data package, and if necessary, any missing
documents forwarded by the laboratory, to the Quality Assurance Division of the
State Office.
The Quality Assurance Division performs the actual qualitative analysis of the
data. Based upon the sampling results in the data package, the information
presented from the Preliminary Data Review, and their own expertise, they either
accept or reject various components of the data package. This function performed
by the Quality Assurance Division is generally the most intensive part of the Data
Quality Assurance process.
2.11.7 RECORDS
The data package itself serves as a record of what data are accepted or rejected by
the Quality Assurance Division.
-------
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW
OF CONTRACT LABORATORY PROGRAM ORGANICS DATA
Revision 5
L/2WS5
Site Name:
Case // and/or SAS // :
CLP Laboratory:
Contract // :
CLP Data Received from Laboratory on:
Preliminary Review completed on:
Laboratory contacted about Missing Information on:
Supplemental Information received from Laboratory on:
Preliminary Reviewed Data submitted
to the Monitoring Management Branch on:
Preliminary Reviewer:
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
1.0 Cover Letter
1.1 Is the Narrative or Cover Letter present?
1.2 Are the following items contained in the Narrative
or Cover Letter:
a. Case Number and/or SAS Number
b. Contract Number
2.0 GC Screen Data (Optional)
2.1 Is the GC Screen Data Sheet present?
(See Attachment 2.1)
2.2 Are all the sample numbers listed on the GC Screen
Data Sheet?
2.3 Are the GC Screen Chromatograms present for the
samples and blanks? If no, please list the missing
Chromatograms below.
Missing Chromatograms:
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
3.0 Organic Analysis Data
3.1 Are the four W Organic Analysis Data Sheets (VOA,
BNA, Pesticides and Tentatively Identified Compounds)
present for each of the following. (See Attachment
3.1) If no, please list the missing Data Sheets below.
a. Samples and/or fractions as appropriate
b. Matrix spikes and matrix spike duplicates
c. Blanks
Missing Data Sheets:
VOA:
BNA:
Pesticides:
TIC:
3.2 Are the Reconstructed Ion Chromatograms for each sample,
the mass spectra for the identified compounds, and the
Data System Printouts (Quant, list) included in the
sample package for each of the following. If not, please
list the missing Reconstructed Ion Chromatograms,
mass spectra, and Data System printouts below
a. Samples and/or fractions as appropriate
b. Matrix spikes and matrix spike duplicates
(Mass spectra not required)
c. Blanks
Missing Reconstructed Ion Chromatograms and Data System Printouts:
Missing Mass Spectra:^
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANIC DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
3.3 Are the mass spectra for the standards present for
compounds identified in the samples?
Missing Mass Spectra:
Are the mass spectra for the tentatively identified
compounds and associated "best match" spectra
included in the sample package for each of the
following. If no, please list the missing numbers
below.
a. Samples and/or fractions as appropriate
b. Matrix spikes and matrix spike duplicates
(Mass Spectra not required)
c. Blanks
Missing Mass Spectra:
4.0 Surrogate Percent Recovery Summaries
4.1 Are the Surrogate Percent Recovery Summaries present
for each of the following matrix:
a. Water (See Attachment 4.1) _
b. Soil (See Attachment 4.2) _
4.2 \re all the samples listed on the Surrogate Percent
Recovery Summaries for each of the following matrix:
a. Water (See Attachment 4.1) _
b. Soil (See Attachment 4.2)
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
4.3 Are the surrogate percent recoveries listed for all
the blanks?
Are all the water data within the specified limits
presented in Attachment 4.1 for the following parameters:
(Please circle the outliers in red.)
a. Volatiles
b. Semi-Volatiles
c. Pesticides
4.5 Are all the soil data within the specified limits
presented in Attachment 4.2 for the following
parameters: (Please circle the outliers in red.)
a. Volatiles
b. Semi-Volatiles
c. Pesticides
5.0 Reagent Blank Summary
5.1 Is the Reagent Blank Summary present?
(See Attachment 5.1)
5.2 Is there at least one blank listed on the Reagent
Blank Summary for every twenty (20) samples?
6.0 Matrix Spike Duplicate/Recovery Form
6.1 Is the Matrix Spike Duplicate/Recovery Form present?
(See Attachment 6.1)
6.2 Is there one duplicate listed on the Matrix Spike
Duplicate/ Recovery Form for every twenty (20)
samples?
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
7.0 GC/MS Tuning and Mass Calibration Forms
7.1 Are the GC/MS Tuning and Mass Calibration forms present
for the following:
a. Bromofluorobenzene (BFB)
(See Attachment 7.1)
b. Decafluorotriphenylphosphine (DFTPP)
(See Attachment 7.2)
-------
Revision 5
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA
7.2 List the time and date that the Volatile fractions were run below:
Sample Number
Instrument
Time
Date
7.3 List the time and date that the BFB samples were run below:
Instrument
Time
Date
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA
7.4 List the time and date that the Semi-Volatile fractions were run below:
Sample Number
Instrument
Time
Date
7.5 List the time and date that the DFTPP samples were run below:
Instrument
Time
Date
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
7.6 Are the bar graph spectrum and mass/charge (m/z)
listings for the BFB provided for each twelve (12)
hour shift? If no, please list the missing spectrum
and listings below.
Missing spectrum and listings:
7.7 Are the bar graph spectrum and mass/charge (m/z)
listings for the DFTPP provided for each twelve (12)
hour shift? In no, please list the missing
spectrum and listings below.
Missing spectrum and listings:
7.8 Is the Cross Reference Table present
(Refer to Attachments 7.1 and 7.2)
8.0 Instrument Tune and Performance Summary (Optional)
S.I Is the Instrument Tune and Performance Summary
present? (See Attachment 8.1)
3.2 Are the BFB and DFTPP Performance Results found
within the specified criteria presented in
Attachment 8.1?
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
9.0 Initial Calibration Data Sheets
9.1 Are the Initial Calibration Data Sheets present and
completely filled out for all compounds for the
following fractions:
a. Semi-Volatiles (See Attachment 9.1)
b. Volatiles (See Attachment 9.2)
9.2 Are the semi-volatile data within the specified
limits presented in Attachment 9.1?
(Please circle outliers in red.)
9.3 Are the volatile data within the specified limits
presented in Attachment 9.2?
(Please circle outliers in red.)
10.0 Calibration Check Sheets
10.1 Are the Calibration Check Sheets present and
completely filled out for all compounds for
the following fractions:
a. Semi-Volatiles (See Attachment 10.1)
b. Volatiles (See Attachment 10.2)
10.2 \re the semi-volatile data within the specified
limits presented in Attachment 10.1?
(Please circle outliers in red.)
10.3 Are the volatile data within the specified limits
presented in Attachment 10.2?
(Please circle outliers in red.)
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
11.0 Standards Data Package
11.2 Are the Reconstructed Ion Chromatograms, Data System
Printouts (Quant, list), and work sheet calculations
present for the following:
a. Samples
b. Blanks _
c. Matrix spikes
d. Matrix spike duplicates
11.3 Are the Gas Chromatograms and Data System Printout
present for the following:
a. Pesticide Standard _
b. PCB Standard
10
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA
11.4 List the times and dates that the Pesticide/PCB samples were run,
if the laboratory has not summarized them in a table.
Sample Number
Instrument
Time
Date
11.5 List the times and dates that the Pesticide/PCB Standards were run,
if the laboratory has not summarized them in a table.
Instrument
Time
Date
11
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA YES NO
12.0 Detection Limits
12.1 Is the list of currently calculated detection
limits present? (The limits should not be the
same for all of the parameters.)
13.0 Package Copies
13.1 Are all the xeroxing of readable quality?
12
-------
Revision 5
1/24/85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP DATA (cont'd)
REVIEW CRITERIA
14.0 Reagent Blank Chronology
List the time and date that a reagent blank or instrument blank
was run on instrument for each of the fractions listed below:
Sample Number
VOAs
BNAs
Instrument
Time
Date
Pesticides/PCBS
13
-------
Revision 5
1/2W85
CHECKLIST FOR PRELIMINARY REVIEW OF CLP ORGANICS DATA (cont'd)
Review Criteria Supplemental Information Table
Review Criteria
Sample
Number
Instument Time
Date
./ /
/ /
-------
GC SClHtN DATA SHEET
Laboratory Name
Number
Sample
ID Number
Fraction
VOA
B/N/A
Pesticides
Dioxin
VOA
B/N/A
PtscicidM
Oioxin
VOA
B/N/A
taiicid«s
Oioxin
VOA
B/N/A
Pesticides
Oioxin
YOA
8/N/A
Pesticides
Oioxin
VOA
B/N/A
Pesticioes
Oioxin
VOA
B/N/A
Pesticides
Oioxin
GC
Detectable*
Medium Level
-
Date
Qt
SCJ 8 CM
.-'
Level of
CC/MS
Analysis**
Date
of
Anaiviij
^
^Answer Yei or No.
•indicate -M- lor medium level CC/M2 truly«is;
indicate 1." (or low level COM2 uialyiu.
-------
ATTACHMENT 3.1
' 9v*M I^MBBWBI OMW
>i»l TO/M7.]««
Organic* An*Jy*» Orta Shwt
O Ma:.
TOO 3
'5 3S
74- i*- 3
«•> 86 J
'C7-0« 2
7t 43 3
71 55 «
i 08 05 «
?S 27 4
CeranaNa:
Vairtte Compound*
Om l
Momur» (0«e»m»at
) 1 l-Trienlerovinin*
7J-34.J
»7
'0081 02-8
7J-00-J
71.4J.J
0'
no- 75 •
127. IS
'089(3
108 90 7
130.41 <
'00 42 S
1122
1 1 2
$'¥'•«*
^...1 !•..« >« t^*B
• «SC Ht
4 M
form I. Organio An*lysi§ Data Sheet,
B-28
5/84
-------
ATTACHMENT 3.1
f 0. •»•!•,
• UJ11
Orvantea Aiwiysia Data Slwvt
Dm*
CAS
•2 75 »
lOf-H-2
•2 43 3
M
S4' 75.1
'06-44-7
100-S1-4
tS
44-7
3M34 32 »
104-44-4
44-7
47-72-1
98 94 3
78
98 74 4
10S 67 J
65 85-0
l tl-41-1
120-43-2
120-42-t
»i-20-3
1O4-47-4
67 «4-3
4» SO-7
»l 47 4
9' 44 7
44 74-4
131 11 3
:04 Ml
9»
l 3
1 2 4.T>KfMo>oe>tl«n*
2 4 4 Ti<
CAS
SI 28 1
132 «4-»
1J1.14.J
i«o« ":L
64.44-2
•7QOS-72.3
•4-7J.7
100-01-4
•6-IO-4
101 4S-J
1 14-74.1
87 84-J
123 12 7
84-74-2
20S-44-0
»2 J7 i
129-00-0
IS ««.7
54 44 3
1 1 7 »t-7
2'S-Oi »
117 M-0
207 0»-»
W 32 •
3» 4
13 70 J
'»» 24 2
«.CM«H4«««
1 3
Pom I. (continued),
4 M
B-29
5/84
-------
ATTACHMENT 3.1
• mil
Organic* Analytic Data Sn««t
3)
Cane/Oil **cnr
CAS
)1» 14 «
JH-IS-7
J1»-l« 1
SI «» »
?« **-l
304 00-2
102*. 5' 3
!S9-*I «
60-57 t
11 iS »
72-20-*
3321 : 45 »
73 54-«
7*21 »7-«
1031-07 t
SO- 29- 3
7J-43 S
S34M-70-J
S7-7«.»
8001 35 2
I2S74-I' 2
H '0*-28 2
11 141 -l(-i
S34«9 21 9
12872 21 «
110*7 »». i
nos«.§2 5
Aloni-tHC
s»n-a«c
0»m »»C
G«m"»«-tMC ,'unoan«l
•»«W»««ior
AtOriM
->«0't£n"x EsaixH
{naeiul'tn 1
Oiddrm
« 4 -001
S-Ori"
EnoetuJ'in »
4 4 300
Eftdfi" Aidt^vo*
En4fllu»4n SuKll*
4 4 -OOT
M«T^OtW^IOV
Enann <«Tgn«
CW«rfl»«»
^OIiO"(»«»
»'OCIOr 'OH
iroc a- '22'
»»oeiof-i 232
*'OCi(jr-l242
Araeier ' :«S
i'ocio/ i 2J4
Aionix-' 290
V. • vtfuffw •< t«* ntriei lull
Fora I' (continued).
B-30
5/8-
-------
ATTACHMENT 3.1
0 !•«
L *MM2Uti TO/UM
Orytnica Analytu O«U Sh««t
(Pig* «)
T«ntativ«ly ld*ndfMd Compounds
CM
"
•T«r ton
_ IMWWIM
!«•/<» u«/tf |
form I »in 9
Form I. (continued).
B-31
5/84
-------
WATER SURROGATE PERCENT RECOVERY SUMMARY
CD
I
•JO
at
»-»
!•***«
Mtt.
» VALUES >
**ADVISOR1
Comment
IWU««-M
iM-
u •<«•••-
• flU«l-ft4
tn-iMi
«!••-
MUIM-X
HI-IM>
i-«iun»-
»»«••».
I*4-IIC»
nM»»n-
•i«
a»->««
IRE OUTSIDE OF CONTRACT REQUIRED QC LIMITS VoUtl
LIMITS ONLT S*"1 ~
Pwlk
fM-VOLATa
M4MA.-M
l(»-IUt
to*i *»• •' 1
VtlitUttl *"' •' •
M«n »ut «
r 1
Ml««
a»-ii»
«.«.« IktMH*
KM*
II»-IM>
•niTicnc-
-.„**
•**ni**n
H«-IM>
Mil4« *f QC IMU
Mitt 14* of QC limlO
gullet of QC limilt
>
TTACHMENT*.!
FOBU II
-------
SOIL SURROGATE PERCENT RECOVERY SUMMARY
CAM No
ta
70
it
L«- U-*_
t*«
i*Af rM
•A.
• VALUES
**ADVISOR
Cocnm«o
VOtAILC
.;;..
(IIMM-M
tCM-VOtAlH-C
«•"*«
1-riMM-
ARE OUTSIDE OF CONTRACT REQUIREO QC LIMITS
T LIMITS ONLY
!•:
ll*-IMt
V*UII
P»«lk
MIMl-M
^ttl . •»' •' I '
V*Utit«tl Ml »f 1 1
W*u •"* *' | «
•»•
-iar-
MUIH-
wlil44 «f QC •"•"»
UltO* «f OC llRMll
HJ|(J4« «f QC llMII
<*"" 1K--
7-*, I MTIAII i~>, , , . , ,
FORMH
-------
REAGENT BLANK SUMMARY
Cankado
CentMlMa..
ot
*-
o
H
>
n
rn
H
FORM
4/C4
Reagent Blank Summary
-------
Coot) No.
WATER MATRIX SPIKE/MATRIX SPIKE DUPLICATE RECOVERY
CoMioclor CoaUool No.
ASTERISKED VALUES AM OUTSIDE OC
BHJ:
VOAi.
0/N_
ACIO-
MSI -
.•ui ol.
•unfcfc OC Mt>
•um* OC k"N»
•uiiM* OC IMii
NICOViHV:
VOAt.
ACM) wll
HST wl<
FNACTION
VGA
SMO
SAW it NO
•/N
suo
SAUPlt HO.
SAMPLE NO
COMPOUND
I.I OtcMrwovlKcn*
TftcMa>o«lh«n«
Orio* ob«n | « n<
fnli«cn«
BrnfrA«
>.? 4 fi«Mo*ohmitn<
AwnjphihffM
}.4 OwMiotolutn*
Ol Mt^|VtplMk«M«
PV***
N^tMlMO Dl«t ^OpyUMM
1 4D*cMwohMf«m
Nw^ta.^*^.!
r*.~n»
lOUa>o«* J MrtKf^MMl
HW4
ImttM
HcpiwMw
AMiM
O«Uii«
EnhM
«.«' DOT
OOMC STIKE
AODiO l«|l
SAMPLE
MESULI
COHC
MS
«c
CONC
MSO
NIC
urn
-™tt
TWr
M
14
11
II
II
11
11
It
49
31
11
11
)*
42
«•
41
M
|t
11
11
It
}|
11
LUJIIS*
dECDOtRV
• 1 I4&
;i iza
It 110
)1 US
fi in
It 91
4t III
24 f (
II III
2« 121
41 III
11 II
• 10}
12 •»
21 121
2JI>
1010
If 121
19 111
40 110
12 120
»f Ml
10 111
>
H
n
m
ON
I ; MiMfOCIMM
m
OD
FOAMM
For* III. HS/HSD Result* (water).
4/84
-------
N*.
SOIL MATRIX SPIKE /MATRIX SPIKE DUPLICATE RECOVERY
M«
L**«l.
u>
I
tfl ACTION
VOA
SMO
SAMflt NO
I/N
SMO
SAMPLE NO
COMPOUND
I.I 0«*ioloi«l»n>
fiKfcloitMltMna
OJntOlOTIICTO
In44««M
• fftlfW*
1 1.4 lncMoiabmntM
Actiuefclltm
7 4 OtntfolokMn*
D. o (ulTlpMK^tll
^yitna
N M^iond, • FiopYlMBkvt
1 4 OK*4oiotMnnn«
rrxl « Kloafitwnal
««txJ
) Chkuopttmot
4 O.IO.D } M>tt>«l«*»nol
4 N,l,,,|*.r>oJ
l..«1«^«
llnXKMo*
AkbM
OxLtiin
(ntiM
44'OO(
CDNC »IK(
A DOt 0 |ui|
SAMftf
MI SUlt
CONC.
US
,
*(C
CONC
MSO
%
MfC
_P1
TWIT
n
14
II
?!
2|
11
1*
41
4)
M
M
II
41
M
U
11
M
U
11
41
M
4i
10
f4JMiis*__
MrcdwiHV
Mill
«i in
Mill
Milt
MI41
M 101
11 1)1
»•»
»IH
» 141
41 lit
M 104
II IM
MM
JSI03
MI01
II 114
tttil
KIM
14 111
11 IM
4JIJ»
HIM
H
>
n
2
rn
H
'ASUHISKIO VAIUCS AME OUTSIDE oc nuns
Hro vo»i.
i'N ._
ALIO_
MSI _
ComnwnU: _
-OUI Ol .
. Out ol _
. oo< al .
. out «l .
Hrto OC HnUlt
OC *««.ll
lKtl OC IHMII
iMite OC IUMII
MECOVEMV:
VOA. •«•<
rtsn
•uuldi OC IM*i
OC IMu
OC Itorio
•ullU* OC IMU
FORM IN
Fora 111. MS/MSI) Keaulta («oll).
-------
ATTACHMENT 7.2
QC/MS TUNING AND MASS CALIBRATION
0«eafluorotriph«nylpho«phln« (DFTPP)
Contnaar
Contract No.
UkiO.
On*
Ora
Autftonod It:
•* IOM A*UNOAMCI OIITIIIIA
MI Ltrtvt
11
I
^ «•> 1 J» «•
C )'
17?
IfT
MM) 1J3»«<
100-
«oo%««
i
THIS HMOKMAWCI TUM A*»un ro Tut
. ILANKS ANO
UM»U 10
L>« 10
OATI Of AM4.TIU
TlUI 0* AMAkTtlS
4/84
FORM V
Form V- DFTPP Tuning «nd H*is C«libr«cion.
5/8-
-------
ATTACHMENT 7.1
GC/MS TUNING AND MASS CALIBRATION
Bromofluorob«nz«n« (BFB)
Ctm
Irmr
Life I0
10
Camneior
0«it
Tim*
DM* A«tuM Autnortnd By:
IK<* IOM ASUMOANCI CRITERIA
WULATIVt
H
7i
M
M
IT3
174
m
171
tT7
U.O • 40.0% *< Do MB •»>
X.O • H.0% «f tn* am MM
•Mt OM4. 100% r*ttti«« •Aunoin^
1.0 • 1 .0% at it* MM «•»
LM> m*n 1 .0% »< o» MM mt
QTMIV mwi H.0% a< ltd M« auk
S.O . 1.0% H m-» 174
b«mr tMn tS.0%. awf M in*n 101 0% at mm* 174
ii • (J% «1 «M» 17*
( J1
C )'
C 3J
' V«k» HI •rtmnmn * % ra* 17«.
'Viluc •» HramMmt « » («•!» 174.
THIS HMfOHMANCS TUNC APPLIU TO THC FOLLOWING
i LAX US AND STANDARDS.
&I.I 10
LAI IO
OATI OF ANALYSIS
TIME OF ANALYSIS
4/34
FORM V
Fona V. BFB Tuning and Hass Cdlibracion.
B-43
5/84
-------
INSTRUMENT TUNE AKO PERFORMANCE SUHHAXT
CASE NO.
LOW LEVEL"
WATER
CONTRACTOR
MED. LEVEL
SOIL/SED.
CONTRACT NO.
HIGH LEVEL
OTHER (SpecTTTT
DFTPP and BFB Performance Results:
~" The DFTPP performance results were reviewed and found to be within the
— specified criteria.
The BFB performance results were reviewed and found to be within the
— specified criteria.
DFTPP
Ion Abundance Criteria
percent or mass
Hess
—5T
68
70
127
197
198
199
275
365
441
442
443
Mass
198
less then 2 percent of mass 69
less than 2 percent of mass 69
40-60 percent of mess 198
less than 1 percent of mass 198
base peak, 100 percent
5-9 percent of mass 198
10 - 30 percent of mass 198
greater than 1 percent of mass 198
present but less mess than 443
greater than 40 percent of mass 198
17-23 percent of mass 442
BFB
Ion AbundTnce Criteria
15-40 percent of mass 95
75 30 • 60 percent of mass 95
95 base peak, 100 percent
96 5-9 percent of mess 95
173 less then 2 percent of mess 174
174 greater than 50 percent of mass 95
175 5-9 percent of mess 95
176 greater than 95 percent.
but less than 101 percent of 174
177 5-9 percent of mess 176
Deviations;
Date/T1me7lnstniB«nt File Nunber Compound
m/z
Required
Abundance
Observed
Abundance
Caments:
Revision Date 1/83
-------
ATTACHMENT 9.2
Initial Calibration Data
Voiatrl* HSL Compound!
C«MNo:
Contractor _
ComnetNo:.
Instrument I 0 .
Ctlioritien Oil*
Minimum XT for SPCC • 0.30O M««imum % ftSO (or CCC * 30%
IP
"'100
"'
no
"»JOO
«MO
CCC-
1 I .o«">o'o«t'>«"«
•>cnioro«in«A«
2 tultn
Vinyt «£tll»
Tf»nt-l
(122
Stvrtn*
m* •«•>«• •> u«/
cce-c*
Fora VI. Initial Calibration - Volatlla HSL Compound!
B-45
5/84
-------
ATTACHMENT 9.1
Mttt Caflbratton Data
CiUWMiUf. «
Caiman*.
IO _
Calibration 0«tr
MJniwtwn I? for SPCC « O.MO MMvmjm % (WO 1
«*«.
fc«.3 Cy»«»u»i".i»u«i"ui<»*«i"»""
TT
TT
ir» • 11 «*
CCC-
Fora VI. Initial Calibration - Semi-Volatile HSL Compounds
3-46
-------
ATTACHMENT 9.1
tnhtel Calibration O«t>
HSU Compounds
CM* No: _
Contractor: .
Con if set No:
ln«rum«nt IO _
Cllibrvuon 0*t«:
Minimum iff for SPCC « O.OM Maximum % KSO for CCC m 3O%
wee
I. «-Qi ..... imimm
2. i
0>-n-Oe>vi Pttm«ra
••nalg.
CCC-
(II-
Form VI. Initial Calibration - Semi-Volatile HSI. Compounds
B-47
9/3i Rev
-------
ATTACHMENT 10.2
Continuing Calibration Chock
VotatHo HSL Compounds
CM* No:
Calibration 0«tt
Tim«: ^___^__
Contract No: _
Inotrumont IO:
Laboratory 10
Initial Calibration Date:
Minimum *f for SPCC it 0.30O Mi«imum *0 for CCC * 28%
'so-
so
CCC Ciiwrac
Fora VII. Continuing Calibration Data - Volatllt*
5/84
-------
ATTACHMENT 10,1
Continuing Calibration Ch*efc
S«m~»
AAilin*
2 CIMO»«««»»«OI
t 3 0«f"»foe»*»«
4 M«i«vton»i9<
n.nntrqtff.0""-*1 Jainmin*
N*< K4C ^ 'O' O*t" • f *
Nn'ae»f«»n«
W0"0'0^»
J Niiraenvnoi
J 4.0i"««l''»lon«"<»
ScntOK Acid
004 2 CMo»0»tnO«»*i««T»«I>«
2 4.0'eniofoen«noreannin«
"•UC^'O'OOwHO^"*
4.CMoro.J.M«..,18"«-o.
2 4 6 Tr>cniof9en«no«
2 4 i T.,cn>o>oo"«~J<
2 Cn>oran«ontn««n*
Oim»ir>»' *nin«i4i*
Acvf^aonmv**^*
3 K'facn.i.n*
A• 2S%
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ucc
• •
• •
Form VII. Continuing Calibration Data - Semi-Volatiles
B-50
-------
ATTACHMENT 10.1
Continuing Calibration Chock
Somivotetilo HSL Compounds
CM* No:
Ott*
Contr»ctWo:
Tim«:
Libor»tory 10:
Calibration 0
-------
-------
LABORATORY QA CONSIDERATIONS
2.12.1 PURPOSE
To ensure that proper laboratory space is available to accommodate samples
needed to accurately portray existing conditions at a site. This also takes into
account any sample allocation requirements and/or limitations imposed by the
laboratory or laboratories on a week by week basis.
2.12.2 APPLICABILITY
The availability of lab space and allocation of samples is a necessary part of
planning and scheduling site investigations. Laboratory arrangements must be
completed before a site inspection can be conducted.
2.12.3 DEFINITIONS
None
2.12.4 DISCUSSION
The process by which sample space is procured is discussed in general terms.
Each individual state office may adhere to office specific guidelines for
scheduling and planning sample space.
2.12.5 RESPONSIBILITIES
The personnel directly involved in the procurement of samples include:
1) Field Project Manager, who determines the number of samples needed.
2) State Office Sampling Coordinator, who assembles sampling needs on a
weekly basis and relays this information to a Sample Management Office.
3) Sample Management Office liaison, who arranges for the laboratories to
be used for each site investigation.
2.12.6 PROCEDURES
It is the responsibility of the Field Project Manager of each individual site to
convey his/her sample requirements to the Sampling Coordinator.
During the early part of the week, the Sampling Coordinator should assemble
the sampling requirements needed for the following week's sampling efforts.
This information is presented to the Sample Management liaison, who in turn
arranges for the designation of laboratories to be used. Once the laboratories
are known and the number of samples requested by site are confirmed, the
information is conveyed back to the Sampling Coordinator, who notifies the
respective Field Project Managers.
-------
LABORATORY QA CONSIDERATIONS
2.12.7 RECORDS
Organic and Inorganic Traffic Reports are retained to identify the samples sent to
the laboratory.
Among the information included on the Traffic Reports are sample number,
laboratory, sampling office, sample matrix, concentration, sample description,
and shipping information.
-------
PROJLCI
MANAGER
REQUESTS
SAMPlES
PHOJEC1
MANAQEH
H L U U( SIS
SAMHl t S
PROJECT
MANAGER
^REQUESTS
SAMPLES
COORDINATES
SAMPLES
AND RELAYS
SAMPLE
REQUIREMENTS
OFFICE
SAMPLING
[COORDINATOR
PROCUREMENT OF
SAMPLE SPACE FOR SITE INSPECTIONS
ARRANGES FOR
LABORATORIES
AND RELAYS
CONFIRMATION
OFFICE
SAMPLING
COORDINATOR
NOTIFIES
PROJECT MANAGERS
-------
3.0 DECISION CRITERIA
3.1 INTRODUCTION
After the inspector has completed gathering and
evaluating all the appropriate data, a recommendation must be
made on what next to do with the site. There are four possible
categories of options that EPA has developed. To foster
consistent decision making across all EPA Regions and all
States funded under EPA's CERCLA program. States should adopt
this approach. In this way, the public can be sure that
decisions made in one Region or State are consistent with
decisions made in another Region or State. For the most part
the criteria to be presented applies to both PA's and Si's
because the two activities vary only in the quantity and
depth of information available for a site.
In most cases where no data are available, the
investigator should presume the worst until he/she has obtained
information to lead one to conclude otherwise.
The four major disposition catagories are:
0 no further CERCLA action (NFA)
0 further CERCLA action (FA)
0 further non-CERCLA action (pending)
0 emergency action (removal)
A site recommended for emergency action is the only
situation where a site might be categorized into two categories.
A site should not be both FA and pending.
3.2 NFA
A decision for NFA should be particularly well justified.
An NFA decision removes the site from any further CERCLA or
State consideration. A decision for NFA should address all
routes of exposure-air, surface water, ground water, direct
contact, fire and explosion. A NFA decision should be supported
with information that there is no potential for exposure to
hazardous substances or pollutants through these routes.
The criteria are:
0 site does not exist
0 site is part of another site already listed on NPL
0 no hazardous wastes or hazardous waste generating
practices
-------
-2-
a hazardous substance is naturally occurring
all hazardous waste exist in quantities/
concentrations that are diminimous.
3.2 PENDING
Many sites will be referred for further action but not
under CERCLA authorities. These sites are ones which may
pose a threat to human health and the environment but which
due to statuatory or policy decision are not addressed under
CERCLA. EPA will categorize these sites as pending in the
ERRIS/CERCLIS data base. In most cases, States will follow
up on these sites.
The pending criteria are:
0 sites precluded from listing for policy reasons:
- RCRA sites with a Part B permit
(received waste after January 23, 1983)
- FIFRA sites (?)
0 sites covered by Uranium Mill Tailing Control
Act (UMTRCA) and Atomic Energy Act (AEA)
-see page 6
0 petroleum/natural gas facilities CERCLA
-other petroleum/natural gas wastes products
can be addressed under CERCLA
0 sites below 28.5 cut-off or sites which would
not qualify for NPL
0 any other site preculded from listing.
3. 3 FA
A decision for further action generally falls out after
you have excluded NFA and pending sites. Further action
decisions can include consideration for NPL listing or a
follow-up site inspection. The State CA guidance specifies
that State CA funds are to be used only to gather more data
for HRS. Sites needing additional work to confirm no further
action should be referred to the EPA Regional office for
follow-up.
-------
-------
SITE INSPECTION SCENARIOS
Residents of a community near an industrial park,
spurred by highly publicized stories of other
communities discovering that their drinking water
supplies were highly contaminated by local industries,
had their drinking water supply analyzed. The testing
results indicated the presence of low levels of phenol,
PA interviews and investigations indicated the
presence of several potential sources of the
contamination within the industrial park, one of which
was an NPL site. The industrial park is located in an
area which drains into the river that serves as the
community's drinking water source.
Samples were collected during the SI. Testing results
indicated that the only industrial site that showed
traces of contaminants leaving the facility boundaries
that were similar to those detected downstream was the
NPL site.
-1-
-------
Two bird watching naturalists observed approximately
50 partially buried barrels while hiking down an old
railroad grade in a rural area of the Blue Ridge
Mountains. The barrels appeared to have been in this
location for a long period of time; they were corroded
and the vegetation cover was thick in places. Upon
further examination, the naturalists discovered that
more drums were present and that there were small
unvegetated areas where the soil had a blue crust.
One of the naturalists opened a drum to determine the
nature of its contents and immediately fainted. He
recovered within twenty minutes and was treated at a
local hospital for burns to his nasal passages.
EPA undertook a PA and conducted telephone interviews
with local officials. They learned that a large
county dump had operated in this area for 10 years,
but was closed around 1965. It was an unsecured,
unlined dump which accepted wastes 24 hours a day.
EPA also learned that the dump was located between two
mountain ridges and above naturally occurring clay
soils.
The closest population using ground water was seven
miles away over several ridges. Surface water users
were 15 miles downstream from the site. It was
determined, during the PA, that the area was not a
Federally-designated sensitive environment.
Magnetometer surveying of the site, conducted during
the SI, indicated the potential presence of buried
drums in an area of about one quarter acre. Reliable
interviewees indicated that the dump had been no more
than 10 feet deep. Contaminant levels in sample
leachate from the drum disposal area were high in
heavy metals and PCBs. Off-site stream samples taken
1.5 miles downstream from the site did not indicate
the presence of contaminants above the lower detection
limit. EPA investigators found that the railroad
grade was frequented by bird watchers and young
motorcyclists.
-2-
-------
A resort developer in a rural area had a well drilled
to serve as the drinking water source for his resort
community. He had routine drinking water analyses
performed on water from the well. The testing results
indicated levels of chromium well above the State's
water quality standards level. A competing developer,
whose drinking water was drawn from a different
watershed, heard of the analysis results and reported
the problem to the Regional EPA office.
PA activities revealed the presence of several logging
operations in the same watershed as the affected
aquifer.
SI inspectors collected ground water samples from the
affected aquifer. Analysis of the samples showed
consistently high levels of chromium. Geological
research of the area indicated that the ridges in the
region are comprised of peridotites and serpentines.
Analyses of heavy minerals collected from pan samples
taken throughout the watershed confirmed the presence
of high quantities of chromite.
-3-
-------
A State conducted a PA on a tank farm covering over 50
acres in a densely populated urban area. The main
operation is adjacent to a navigable river. In
addition, the facility is above a shallow aquifer
which is the municipal water supply for a city of
35,000 only one mile downgradient. Nearby residents
frequently complain of odors from their tap water.
All of these residents use the municipal water supply;
however, about half of them have switched to bottled
water for drinking water. During the PA, the State
determined that the facility is a small fuel
distribution center.
Ground water samples collected during the SI showed
over 10 ppm of hexane through dodecane. There was
also an easily observed sheen discharging from the
bank of the river adjacent to the facility- Analysis
of surface water samples indicated the presence of the
same contaminants found in the ground water.
-4-
-------
A chemical company synthesized organic chemicals,
paints and pigments on a 300 acre site from 1940 until
1980. It is located in a small industrial area,
adjacent to a creek which discharges into a large
river. Several other companies are located upcreek
from the site.
PA studies indicated that the chemical company
disposed of its mixed wastes in a series of lagoons
for about 25 years until 1970. State monitoring of
on-site wells has indicated the presence of solvents
and PCBs. Groundwater is not used as a drinking water
source anywhere within a 20 mile radius of the site.
Approximately 32,000 people get drinking water from a
reservoir located 3.5 miles downstream from the site.
A water sample was collected from the reservoir during
the SI. Testing results indicated that the levels of
PCBs, TCE, and PCE in the reservoir exceed background
and also exceed the EPA Suggested No Adverse Response
Levels (SNARLs). A small capacitor manufacturing
plant is located about one mile upstream from the
chemical company. A sediment sample taken 0.5 miles
upstream from the chemical company indicated the
presence of low levels of PCBs (55 ppm). A sediment
sample taken immediately next to the outfall to the
company contained 550 ppm PCBs. One sample taken 0.6
miles downstream from the chemical company contained
150 ppm PCBs.
-5-
-------
Residents of a small community were complaining of an
unusual odor in their drinking water. Analysis of
samples collected by the residents for routine water
quality parameters did not indicate the presence of
harmful substances.
Available information reviewed during a PA on the
source of the drinking water, a small reservoir, was
scarce; therefore, an SI was conducted.
Analysis of the reservoir water, from samples
collected during the SI, revealed that there were
unusally large amounts of planktonic algae in the
water. EPA gathered further information on
observations of the odor in the water and learned that
they followed a seasonal pattern which correlated with
algae blooms in the reservoir.
-6-
-------
A commercial landfill located two miles from an
industrial park receives hazardous wastes from various
companies producing chemical waste by-products. PA
investigations found that the landfill operation began
in 1973, and in 1980 it received RCRA Interim Status.
In December 1984, it received a RCRA part B permit.
The facility manager has a history of mishandling
hazardous wastes in other parts of the State. Some of
the waste haulers reported during PA interviews that
they had noticed unmarked drums on-site, and off-site
contamination was suspected.
SI inspectors observed improper handling of liquid
hazardous wastes. They also noted many unmarked
barrels leaking at the seams. In addition, it was
apparent from land surface scars that there had been a
number of spills on-site. The disorderly appearance
of the site was'noted. Analyses of samples collected
from one on-site monitoring well indicated low levels
of organics and heavy metals. Samples collected
downstream from the site, about one mile from a major
water supply, showed high levels of contaminated
sediments.
The inspectors also found that the landfill had
stopped receiving wastes for a two year period from
1978 to 1980. Wastes received after 1980 were dumped
in a previously unused portion of the landfill. The
RCRA part B permit covers only this new landfill area.
-7-
-------
A county-lead enforcement cleanup has recently been
completed at an urban hazardous waste dump which
operated from 1960 to 1979 in an area of high annual
precipitation. The dump contains leaking drums and
bulk tanks, and overflowing lagoons. The county
claims that the site's problems have been remedied.
A PA was completed and it was learned that the county
had instituted a comprehensive effort to clean up and
regrade the site. This effort had, in fact,
eliminated discharges to surface waters. The adjacent
surface water supplied drinking water to a city of
10,000.
Some citizens were concerned, however, about ground
water contamination. These citizens notified the EPA
Regional office of the situation. State
investigators, during an SI site visit, collected
ground water samples from a municipal well located two
miles from the waste dump and serving 4,000 people,
and from private wells located between the municipal
well and the dump site. The wells draw water from 60
feet beneath the surface. The State also collected
representative groundwater and surface water samples
to determine background levels of chemicals present in
the aquifer. No contaminants were found above the
lower detection limit in any of the samples. Geologic
analyses of the site's subsurface indicated it is
comprised of unconsolidated rock to a depth of 40 feet
and sandstone from 40 to 65 feet beneath the surface.
County officials assured the State that appropriate
measures had already been taken to remedy the
potentially hazardous situation and argued that State
actions would interfere with county efforts to force
an industrial company to clean up an old disposal area
two miles from the subject site.
-------
9. A metal refinishing plant specializing in chrome
plating was repotted to EPA by a former plant employee
for dumping waste acid, heavy metal solutions, and
solvents into a french drain.
PA activities indicated that the plant is located in
an area that relies solely on groundwater for drinking
water supplies for approximately 12,500 people within
three miles of the plant.
SI sampling of wells within a three mile radius of the
site verified the presence of trichloroethylene in the
drinking water. Concentrations south of the site were
greater for wells located closer to the metal
refinishing plant. Wells northwest and east of the
site showed no detectable amounts of trichloroethylene.
Ground water in all utilized aquifers flows from north
to south in this area.
-9-
-------
-3-
0 ground water/surface water/air releases have
been observed/documented
0 non-dimininous quantities of hazardous waste
exist on site and or may be released into the
environment
0 investigation (sampling) does not reveal
presence of hazardous waste or releases but
geology suggests that there should be or will
be a release eventually.
0 does not reveal presence of hazardous wastes
or releases but past practices are unclear or
not reliable.
0 further investigation is necessary to insure
that the documented remedy is functioning
properly
0 enforcement action is currently ongoing but
no remedial action has taken place
3. 4 EMERGENCY ACTION
In the course of conducting a site inspection, State
inspectors may become aware of situations that pose a more
immediate threat to human health or the environment or releases
that can be readily cleaned up. EPA's "removal" program is
designed to address these problems. "Removal" actions are
not limited to sites on the NPL.
The NCP (47 FR 31214, July 16, 1982) states:
f MOM PhM« III—bnmwttatt removal.
(a) In determining the appropriate
extent of action to be taken at a given
release, the lead agency (hall fint
review the preliminary assessment to
determine if Immediate removal action
It appropriate, immediate removal
action (hail be deemed appropriate in
those case* In which the lead agency
determines that the initiation of
Immediate removal action will prevent
or mitigate immediate and significant
risk of harm to human life or health or to
the environment from such situation* as:
(1) Human, animal, or food chain
exposure to acutely toxic substance*;
(2) Contamination of a drinking water
supply;
(3) Fire and/or explosion; or
(4) Similarly acute situation*.
-------
-4-
EPA proposed changes to the NCP (50 FR 5862, February 12,
1985) to lower the threshold to qualify for "removal" action.
If these proposed criteria are adopted, then in general, releases
at, near, or above ground that can be addressed without compromising
the cost-effectiveness of the solution, can be undertaken.
The proposed NCP States:
(2) Th« fuilowuig factors »hall be
considered in determining the
apropriateness of a removal action
pursuant to this subjection:
(ij Actual or potential exposure to
hazardous substances or pollutants or
contaminants by nearby population*.
animals or food chain:
(ii) Actual or potential contamination
of drinking water supplies or sensitive
ecosystems:
(iii) Hazardous substances or
pollutant or contaminants in drums.
barrels, tanks, a* other bulk storage
containers, that may poee a threat of
release:
(iv) High levels of hazardous
substances or pollutants or
contaminants in soils largely at or near
the surface, thut may migrate.
(v) Weather conditions that may
cause hazardous substances or
pollutants oc contaminants to migrate or
be released;
(vi) Threat of fire or explosion;
(vii) The availability of other
appropriate Federal or State response
and enforcement mechanisms to
respond to the release';
(viii) Other situations or factors which
may pose gjnular threats to public
health, welfar« or the environment.
The only limitation to "removal" action are:
(3) Removal actions, other than those
authorised under section 104tb) of
CKRCLA, shall be terminated after $1
million hue been obligated for the action
or 6 months have elapsed from the date
of initial response unless the lead
agency delermiaes that: (i) there is an
immediate risk to public health, welfare
or the environment, (ii) continued
response actions are immediately
required to prevent, limit, or mitigate an
emergency, and (iii) such assistance will
not otherwise b* provided on a timely
basis.
-------
-5-
3.5 SUBSTANCES COVERED BY CERCLA
CERCLA Section 104 authorized EPA to "act", consistent
with the NCP, when there is a release or threat of a release
a hazardous substances or a pollutant or contaminant.
Section 101(4) of CERCLA defines what substances qualify
as a hazardous substance for CERCLA purposes. They are any
substances designated under:
0 FWPCA 311 (b)(2)(A) CERCLA 102, FWPCA 311(b)(4) -
reportable quantities
0 CERCLA 102, FWPCA 311 (b)(4) - reportable quantities
0 RCRA 3001 - listed hazardous waste or hazardous
waste having certain charateristics
0 FWPCA 307(a) - toxic pollutant
0 CAA 112 - hazardous air pollutant
0 TSCA 7 - imminently hazardous chemical
CERCLA 104 (a)(2) defines a pollutant or contaminant as
that which presents an imminent and substantial danger to the
public health or welfare. This can include mining waste
materials.
Hazardous Substance, pollutant or contaminant does not
include petroleum, including crude oil and any fraction or
natural gas, liquified natural gas, or synthetic gas of
pipeline quality or mixtures of natural gas and such synthetic
gas.
-------
Attachment 1.
-6-
Federal Register / Vol 48. No. 175 / Thursday, September 8, 1983 / Rules and Regulations 10661
Releases of Radioactive Materials
Section 101(22) of CERCLA excludes
several types of releases of radioactive
materials from the statutory definition of
"release." These releases are therefore
not eligible for CERCLA response
actions or inclusion on the NPL. The
exclusions apply to 1) releases of
source, by-product or special nuclear
material from a nuclear incident if these
releases are subject to financial
protection requirements under section
170 of the Atomic Energy Act, and 2)
any release of source, by-product or
special nuclear material from any
processing site designated under the
Uranium Mill Tailings Radiation Control
Act of 1978. Accordingly, such
radioactive releases have not been
considered eligible for inclusion on the
NPL. As a policy matter, EPA has also
chosen not to list releases of source, by-
product, or special nuclear material from
any facility with a current license issued
by the Nuclear Regulatory Commission
(NRC), on the grounds that the NRC has
full authority to require cleanup of
releases from such facilities. (Formerly
licensed facilities whose licenses no
longer are in effect will, however, be
considered for listing.) Comments
generally supported the position.
Some commenters said that EPA
should also not list facilities that hold a
current license issued by a State
pursuant to a delegation of authority
from the NRC pursuant to section 274 of
the Atomic Energy Act (42 U.S.C. :!021|.
EPA ha» decided, however, that its
policy of excluding licensed facilities
from the list should extend only to those
facilities over which the Federal agency,
the NRC, has direct control. When a
facility is licensed by a Slate pursuant to
an NRC delegation, the NRC has no
authority, short of withdrawing the
delegation itself, to enforce conditions of
the license or determine that new
conditions are necessary. EPA
recognizes that the licensing State may
be able to ensure cleanup of any release
through the license, but has decided to
list such sites on the NPL to provide
potential Federal authorities if
necessary. Since listing on the NPL in no
way determines whether actual cleanup
actions will be taken, EPA will be able
to defer to the licensing Slate whenever
the Agency determines that Stale efforts
are adequate to address the problem.
Some commenters staled that no sites
of radioactive releases should be
included on the NPL. for several
reasons. One point made was that other
Federal authorities, such as the Uranium
Mill Tailings Radiation Control Act of
1!178 (UMTRCA). provide adequate
authority to control releases from such
sites. With the exception of certain
specified sites (which EPA has not
considered for listing on the NPL),
however, UMTRCA addresses the
problem only by inclusion of conditions
in facility licenses and does not
authorize any direct response actions.
While UMTRCA may prove adequate in
some cases. EPA believe* that CERCLA
provides sufficiently broader authorities
lo warrant listing in anticipation of the
possibility that action under CERCLA
may prove necessary or appropriate H!
some of these sites.
Another point made was that the MRS
does not accurately reflect the real
hazard presented by radioactive sites
because the HRS scores releases of
radioactive material even when those
releases are within radiation limits
established by the Nuclear Regulatory
Commission and by EPA pursuant to the
Atomic Energy Act. As explained above
in discussing the HRS approach to
scoring observed releases, this factor is
designed to reflect the likelihood thai
substances can migrate from the site.
.10! that the particular release observed
is itself a hazard. In addition. EPA's
experience h.is been that some
radioactive releases do exceed these
standards, confirming the premise of the
HRS thnl y rurrcn! observed release in
low conciMilrHiions may be followed b>
greater releases leading lo higher
concentrations.
-------
-------
The Hazard Ranking Systems (HRS)
Purpose: To teach persons who are performing site inspections the
information requirements of the HRS.
Note: A 2-day teaching and problem session on the HRS is offered
for those persons who develop HRS scores and documentation
packages.
Today's Agenda
1. Overview of the Structure of the HRS
2. A Factor-by-Factor Examination of the Informational Requirements
of the HRS
• Groundwater
• Surface Water
• Air
3. Fire and Explosion and Direct Contact
-------
OVERVIEW
An Overview of the HRS
• How hazardous are the materials on-site?
Toxicity
Persistence
Quantity
• What is the probability these materials will migrate off-site?
Observed release = 100%
Otherwise containment x route characteristics for ground
water and surface water
• If the materials migrate, what are the targets that may be
impacted?
Population vs. distance
Land and water use
Sensitive environments
-------
OVERVIEW
Documentation Issues for the HRS
• Extensive investigation and documentation not required
• Specific HRS items must be documented
• "Preponderance of the Evidence"
• Establish rationale for HRS score
• Document the facts for public review
• A legally defensible record
• Demonstrate fairness
• Evaluation applied on a nationally uniform basis
Documentation Issue for Field Personnel
If the information vital to an HRS factor is gained in a
conversation—
• Telephone log, signed and dated
• Memo to file, signed and dated
• If particularly sensitive, send a letter to the person
summarizing the conversation asking for written confirmation
of accuracy.
-------
OVERVIEW
A Site is defined by where the contamination is rather than by
property lines.
• Where originally deposited
• Where it has migrated to
, A .....
Contaminated Stream
Contaminated Wells
Action Items;
• Search literature for where contamination attributable to the
site has been observed.
• Check surface migration paths for evidence of contamination.
-------
OVERVIEW
A site is evaluated on its condition before remedial actions.
• Before dredging, removal, capping, etc.
• Before the fish were killed and the stream closed to
recreation
• Before municipal water was provided to users of contaminated
wells
Timely waste management actions are not considered to be remedial
actions.
• Regularly scheduled covering of landfill and proper capping
upon closure of a cell
Action Items:
• Search literature for information on past conditions
• Plot out on time scale conditions, management actions and
remedial actions
-------
FACTORS
Factor-by-Factor Analysis of the Information Requirements of the HRS
1. Three factors that appear in all 3 routes are discussed first
• The observed release
• Toxicity/persistence or toxicity (air route only)
• Quantity
2. The three routes are examined next
• Ground water
• Surface water
• Air
-------
OBSERVED RELEASE
An observed release is:
• Valued at 45 points
• Indicates the probability of migration is 100%
The alternative to an observed release is
Route Characteristics x Containment
• Evaluated if there is no observed release
• Value may range from 0 to 45
• Containment indicates the likelihood that materials will
leave the place where deposited
• Route characteristics indicate the likelihood that
uncontained materials will move along the ground water or
surface water pathways.
For the air route if there is no observed release, the route score
is zero.
-------
OBSERVED RELEASE
Analytical Evidence of an Observed Release
"Significantly Higher Level
than the Background Level"
• When a release is observed in any quantity, so long as it is
above background, it can be considered a release. This
factor is not intended to reflect level of hazard but is an
indication that substances can migrate from the site and that
more may do so in the future. 48 FR 40665
• Negative results during one or more sampling intervals cannot
refute a positive finding, when based on valid sampling and
analysis, that an observed release occurred. 49 FR 37078
Examples of Situations in Which a Background Was Not Required
• Uncontained hazardous waste deposited in the water table
• Leachate from site observed flowing into creek
leachate sample must show contamination close to point of
entry into creek
- direct observation plus photograph
• Photograph of dust cloud from tailings pile and of field
personnel gathering dust sample
upwind/downwind airbourne particulate samples would have
been greatly perferred
Action Items:
• Search literature for releases already documented
• Determine what hazardous materials are most likely to be
found, and where
• Plan sampling strategy to assure an adequate background
-------
OBSERVED RELEASE
Needed: A rationale for attributing the contamination to the site
• A good sketch or map showing sampling points
• The hazardous materials were used/stored/released on site
• No alternative source
Sample analytical data for a site;
Above
Below
(ppb)
(ppb)
As
2
6
Cd(l)
5
8
Cr
10
20
Pb(5)
5
112
Cu
15
35
Zn
750
1090
Sample HRS documentation for an observed release
Contaminants detected in surface water at the facility or downhill
from it (5 maximum):
Lead; Ref. 10 - attached data sheet
Note that As, Cd, Cr, Cu and Zn were also somewhat elevated in
the downstream sample versus the upstream background.
Rationale for attributing the contaminants to the facility:
Pb at 112 ppb in creek just below the tailings pile vs. 5 ppb
just upstream. Ref. 10, Ref. 14. The contaminants noted above
were found in the tailings (Ref. 7).
HRS Value = 45
-------
QUANTITY
Hazardous Waste Quantity
Hazardous waste quantity is defined as deposited.
• Contaminated rinse water to lagoon
• PCB-containing oil poured on ground
• Truckloads containing a hazardous component
The issue is not how much would have to be removed to effect a
clean-up.
• Sludge from lagoon
• Contaminated soil at site
Action Items;
On-site meaurements may include:
number of drums
dimensions and contents of tanks
dimensions of evaporation and percolation lagoons
size of piles
Record search includes:
trucking manifests
process engineering vs. production per year (be carefull)
CERCLA 103C notification
-------
TOXICITY/PERSISTENCE
Toxicity/Persistence
• HRS values are read from a 4 x 4 matrix with 4 levels of
toxicity and 4 levels of persistence. The HRS matrix values
range from 0 to 18
• For the air route, toxicity alone is evaluated
• Choose the compound that gives the highest HRS value. This
compound must have a non-zero containment score and be able
to migrate by the route under consideration
Action Items:
• What hazardous substances would you look for?
reprocessing of waste oils
- solvent recovery
metal finishing operation
- wood preservative company
• Evidence of the presence of the compound:
analytical
trucking manifests (specific reference, not generic)
plant process that universally involves the particular
waste
11
-------
GROUND WATER
The Ground Water Route
Often 2 or more aquifers are used in the area.
#11:
Thou shalt not confound aquifers
The aquifer that yields the highest HRS score will be used in the
HRS documentation as the aquifer of concern.
Common Situation:
• Surficial aquifer: observed release and a number of private
wells
• deeper aquifer: no observed release and some communal wells
Data on both aquifers will need to be separately evaluated to
determine which aquifer yields the highest HRS score.
Action Items;
Task 1: Find out about the hydrogeology within 3 mile radius of
site:
• thickness, depth and names of various water-bearing strata
• description of confining layers
• barriers to horizontal migration
• evidence that aquifers function as a single hydrological unit
What sources of information will be useful?
12
-------
GROUND WATER
Observed Release
The release and the background well must be in the same aquifer.
Knowledge of flow gradients help in determining where to look for
background versus contamination...but beware of local or seasonal
variation.
Background well(s) must discriminate out any alternative sources of
the contamination.
Action Items:
• Are there existing nearby wells?
• At what depth are they screened?
• Can existing wells provide an adequate background?
• Are any drinking water wells contaminated?
13
-------
GROUND WATER
Depth of the Aquifer of Concern
• Deepest level at which contamination Is documented
» If depth of deposit is unknown, 6 feet may be assumed
• Highest seasoned level of the saturated zone of the aquifer
Net Precipitation
• Use figures 4 and 5, or the original sources
• In some areas, may get higher HRS value by using seasonal
(one or more consecutive months) data.
- same months for precipitation as for lake evaporation
data must be averaged over at least 10-20 years
Permeability of the Unsaturated Zone
Actual tests
Well logs and Table 2
SCS is not usually helpful
Evaluate the least permeable continuous layer
Physical State
At the time of disposal
-------
GROUND WATER
Containment
Note that containment for groundwater ±s not described by the same
factors as containment for surface water.
The issue is leachate-generation
Surface encourages Surface water
ponding -v ^^^T run-on
Quality of Liner, if any
Leachate collection system, if any
Describe containment in terms of Table 3.
Describe containment before any remedial actions.
Evaluate containment carefully. It has a major impact on the site
score.
Use
Describe use for each aquifer separately.
Describe use before any remedial actions attributable to the site.
Describe before any effects of pollution attributable to the site.
Action Items:
For HRS value of 3:
• Identify at least one user who does not have alternative
water from an unthreatened source readily available
• If a municipal system is threatened, show that the loss of
wells within the 3 mile radius would require the development
of alternative sources to meet the system demand
15
-------
GROUND WATER
Distance to the Nearest Well
• Specify nearest well for each aquifer separately and give
depth of well to verify aquifer
• The well must be currently used for drinking or irrigation
(not monitoring, not industrial) or have ceased to be used
because of contamination specifically attributable to the
site (documentation needed)
• Give location of well and show it on map
• Measure distance from well to nearest point of documented
contamination
• If well is contaminated and contamination is attributable to
the site, the distance is zero
16
-------
GROUND WATER
Population Served
Evaluate separately for each aquifer
For each residential connection or house, count 3.8 persons
Public Supplies
• EPA data base on public supplies (15 connections, 25 people)
• Phone calls to communities for geographical extent of
service, number of connections, location of wells
• State summaries on water supplies
• Is water from the contaminated well potentially deliverable
to any customer served by the system?
Private Wells
• House-count within 3 mile radius from the contamination
• Show clearly on house-count map those areas not counted
because they are served by communal or municipal sources
drawing from a different aquifer
• If more than one aquifer, need some rationale for the
population that is to be attributed to each aquifer
17
-------
GROUND WATER
An Exercise
Develop an MRS ground water score from the following information:
Observed Release: Monitoring well #1, screened from 12 to 16
feet in surficial aquifer, shows chlordane. Not detected in
monitoring wells, 2, 3 and 4.
Hydrogeology: Surficial aquifer at 12 to 30 feet depth in
vicinity of site. Confining layer of silty clay from 30 to 45
feet deep. Clarkson aquifer from 45 to 85 feet. Well logs show
no discontinuity in the clay layer within the 3 mile radius.
Net precipitation is +6".
Site investigation shows contaminated process water was
discharged to an evaporation lagoon. The once-filled operating
capacity of the lagoon is 333 cubic yards (30* by 100' by 3').
The lagoon has no liner or leachate collection systems.
Village of Southland has a radial supply system with 3 wells, 2
of which lie within 3 miles of the site. The closest is 2500
feet from contaminated monitoring well #1. The village engineer
reports that all 3 wells are in the Clarkson with depths ranging
from 58 to 87 feet. The village clerk reports that the system
has 695 residential hook-ups.
The nearest residential well in current use is the Jones
residence, located 1200 feet from the contamined monitoring well
and drilled to 28 feet depth.
A house count within the 3 mile radius of the site (USGS topo,
photo-revised to 1975) and not counting the area served by the
Southland system showed 128 residences. A survey of the state
well logs for this area showed that 65 percent of the wells are
completed in the surficial aquifer.
18
-------
Rating Factor
UJ Observed Release
Ground Water Route Work Sheet
Assigned Value Multl-
(Circle One) pller
0 45 1
Score
Max. Ref.
Score (Section)
45 3.1
If observed release Is given a score of 45, proceed to line [4].
If observed release is given a score of 0, proceed to line \2\.
H] Route Characteristics
Depth to Aquifer of
Concern
Net Precipitation
Permeability of the
Unsaturated Zone
Physical State
3.2
0123 2 6
0123 1 3
0123 1 3
0123 1 3
Total Route Characteristics Score
Lil Containment
H Waste Characteristics
Toxldty / Persistence
Hazardous Waste
Quantity
0123 1
15
3 3.3
3.4
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 1 18
0123456781 3
Total Waste Characteristics Score
LLI Targets
Ground Water Use
Distance to Nearest
Well / Population
Served
26
3.5
0123 3 9
\ 0 4 6 3 10 1 40
12 16 18 20
I 24 X 32 35 40
Total Targets Score
H If line [TJ is 45, multiply
If line [T] la 0, multiply
H3 Divide line [a] by 57,330
T| x [3] « H x [U
49
57,330
and multiply by 100 Sgw-
FIGURE 2
GROUND WATER ROUTE WORK SHEET
19
-------
SURFACE WATER
The Surface Water Route
The first step is to identify the surface water migration path.
Trace out on a map the path(s) that surface run off will take
from the site to the probable point of entry to surface water.
From this probable point of entry follow the surface water flow
in stream miles for three miles (but limited to only one mile of
static water).
All targets (uses, sensitive environments, water intakes) must lie
on or contiguous to this surface water migration path.
The definition of surface water for HRS purposes includes:
• All perennial streams and rivers from their point of origin
to the sea
• Intermittent streams only in areas with less than 20 inches
of normal annual precipitation
• Man-made ditches only insofar as they are perennially flowing
into other surface water
• Isolated but perennial ponds or lakes
The HRS cannot handle those surface water situations where
contaminated ground water is alleged to discharge to surface water
unless contamination of surface water at the point of discharge is
actually measured.
If tidal reversals take place within the migration path, the extent
of these reversals needs documentation.
Action Items:
• When on-site, describe and map out the surface migration path
from each wast area to the nearest surface water
• Determine where on the migration path the most down gradient
samples should be taken that will define the site boundary
20
-------
SURFACE WATER
The Observed Release
• Upstream/downstream samples are normally required, and taken
at such points as to distinguish the site from alternative
potential sources of contamination
• The exception is when contaminated leachate or contaminated
ground water (e.g., a spring) is observed to flow into
surface water
• The most downgradient or downstream point of documented
contamination marks the beginning of the surface water
migration path
Facility Slope and Intervening Terrain
If the site is actually in surface water but without evidence
of release to surface water, note in report
Facility slope is measured from the highest point of
hazardous waste deposit to the most downgradient point of the
storage area or of where contamination is detected
The slope of intervening terrain is measured from the most
down gradient point of documented contamination to the
probable point of entry to surface water
Action Item:
When on-site, measure or estimate the slopes of the waste storage
areas and of the intervening terrain.
Distance to Nearest Surface Water
Measured from the most down gradient point of documented
contamination to the probable point of entry to surface water
21
-------
SURFACE WATER
One Year 24-Hour Rainfall
The value is read from Figure 8.
Physical State
Same procedure as for ground water.
Containment
Do not confuse surface water containment with ground water
containment.
The issue is not leachate generation, but surface run-off.
Describe containment in the terms used in Table 9.
• Adequate free board
• Adequate diking or run-off diversion structure
• Quality of cover
Containment is always evaluated before remedial actions (as
contrasted with timely waste management practices).
Toxicity/Persistence and Quantity
• These factors are usually the same as for ground water
• Occasionally, however, there is a compound or quantity that
has a zero containment value for one route and not the other
• Count only those substances and quantities that can
potentially migrate via the route under consideration
22
-------
SURFACE WATER
Targets
Uses and Sensitive Environments must lie within 3 migration path
miles (limit of 1 mile in static water) from the hazardous
substances.
Population served must be served by surface water withdrawn within 3
migration path miles (limit of 1 mile in static water) from the
probable point of entry of contaminants into surface water.
Critical Habitat does not include the entire range of the species
but only the areas in which the species are normally found nesting
or breeding.
Consideration is limited to federally endangered species.
An open irrigation ditch counts as a part of the migration path and
the 3 mile limit. A pipe does not.
Action Items;
• Examine USGS topo map for any intakes or wetlands
• Contact water authorities to verify whether there are surface
water intakes. Are they used? Population served?
• Contact agricultural authorities for irrigation intakes,
acreage under irrigation
• Contact environmental experts for critical habitats of
Federally endangered species
• If use is recreational, verify with memo on file
23
-------
SURFACE WATER
An Exercise
Develop an HRS surface water score from the following information:
Approximately 450 drums, many on the ground behind the abandoned
transfer center. Sampling indicates spent solvents such as methyl
ethyl ketone, acetone and toluene and wood perserving compounds such
as pentachlorophenol, chromated copper arsenic (CCA) and creosote.
The storage area is essentially flat with drainage to the west north
west to an unnamed tributary of deer creek. The ground is stained
at the storage area and down along the drainage path to the
streambed. Vegetation has been killed or appears stressed. One
year 24-hour rain in the vicinity is 1.5 inches and normal annual
precipitation is 16 inches. The map of the surface migration path
is attached and shows the location of potential targets.
,l&
24
-------
Surface Water Route Work Sheet
Rating Factor
Qj Observed Release
Assigned Value
(Circle One)
0 45
Multi-
plier
1
Score
Max.
Score
45
Ref.
(Section)
4.1
If observed release Is given a value of 45, proceed to line f7j.
If observed release Is given a value of 0, proceed to line [jT.
LU Route Characteristics
Facility Slope and Intervening 0123
Terrain
1-yr. 24-hr. Rainfall 0123
Distance to Nearest Surface 0123
Water
Physical State
\2\ Containment
0123
4.2
1 3
1 3
2 6
1 3
Total Route-Characteristics Score
0123
H Waste Characteristics
Toxiclty / Persistence
Hazardous Waste
Quantity
LU Targets
0 3 6 9 12 15 18
012345678
1
15
3
4.3
4.4
1 18
1 8
Total Waste Characteristics Score
Surface Water Use
Distance to a Sensitive
Environment
Population Serve
to Water Intake
Downstream
2J If line QJ Is 45,
0123
0123
id/Distance 10 4 8 8 10
I 12 16 18 20
| 24 30 32 35 40
26
4.5
3 9
2 6
1 40
Total Targets Score
multiply
If line Q] Is 0, multiply
CZ3 Divide line 0 by 94,350
Q3 x 0 x H
2] x [3] x [7j x [sj
and multiply by 100
55
84,350
»«.-
FIGURE 7
SURFACE WATER ROUTE WORK SHEET
25
-------
AIR ROUTE
The Air Route
If there is no observed release, the pathway score is zero.
Air measurements must be taken at reasonable distances from sources
such as stocks, drum openings, well heads, leachate pool
contaminated soils, etc.
No disturbance of the site is allowable.
Samples should be taken in the breathing zone.
The human nose is not considered an analytical instrument.
OVA in survey mode is not acceptable because it picks up methane.
Show that a volatizing substance is uncontained on site and show
airbourne transport by upwind/downwind sampling.
Dust sample must be taken from locations unaffected by the
activities of residents or workers. Upwind and downwind dust
samples are preferred.
Show sampling locations with respect to the volatilizing or
particulate source and. indicate wind direction during sampling.
Report sampling procedure in detail.
-------
AIR ROUTE
Quantity
Count only those quantities that can migrate by the air route, if
released.
Population/Pistance
Draw concentric rings of 1/4, 1/2, 1 and 4 miles around the
volatizing source, or source of particulate and document population
within each ring.
Note: No provision is made for wind direction in the evaluation of
air route targets.
27
-------
AIR ROUTE
An Exercise
Develop an HRS air score from the following information:
An anonymous tip led to the investigation of this site, a warehouse
and parking lot stacked with an estimated 50 to 60 thousand drums.
Many drums are battered, some leaking and the drums stored outdoors
are corroded. The drums are piled 3 and 4 high.
Spot checks sampling revealed a wide variety of chemicals including
benzene, methyl ethyl ketone, toluene, pciric acid, caustic sludges
and spent acids.
Air sampling was also done because of the smell of chemicals both
inside the warehouse and in the adjoining parking lot. All HNu
readings inside the building were high. An adequate upwind/downwind
sample pair was however, obtained at the northeast corner of the
parking lot (upwind) and the southwest corner of the property line
about 75 feet downwind from the outside drum storage area.
The nearest commercial building is immediately adjacent to the
warehouse. The nearest residential area is almost one half mile to
the north. The historic part of the harbor is less than one half
mile to the east.
The city planning board estimated that over 100,000 persons live
within 4 miles of the site. At least 5000 people work in the
industrial area that surrounds the site, approximately a one half
mile radius. The technical college with 1200 students is located 3
blocks to the north of the site.
28
-------
Air Rout* Work Sheet
Rating Factor
Assigned Value
(Orel* One)
Multi-
plier
Score
Max.
Score
Re«.
(Section)
Observed Rnleane
45
45
5.1
Date and Location:
Sampling Protocol:
If line 0 Is 0, the Sm • 0. Enter on line \5j .
If line R] la 45, then proceed to line \2\.
Waste Characteristics
Reactivity and
Incompatibility
Toxtelty
Hazardous Waste
Quantity
0123
0123
012345678
5.2
Total Waste Characteristics Score
20
Targets
Population Within
4-Mlle Radius
Distance to Sensitive
Environment
Land Use
0 9 12 15 18
21 24 27 30
0123
0123
5.3
30
8
3
Total Targets Score
39
Multiply MJ « [2] x
35,100
LU Divide line Q by 35,100 and multiply by 100
FIGURE 9
AIR ROUTE WORK SHEET
29
-------
-------
APPENDIX A
SOURCES OF INFORMATION
-------
TABLE 1
SOURCES OF INFORMATION FOR CHARACTERIZATION OF
HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
1. Review management records
a. Waste inventories
b. Storage inventories
c. Shipment manifests
d. Permits
2. Search for Waste Generator Records
3. Interview
a. Site Personnel
b. Neighbors
c. Government Inspectors
4. Review Official Agency Files
a. Permit Application
b. Site Inspection Reports
c. Sampling or Monitoring data
5. Consult Toxicology and Hazardous Substances References
a. Chemical Hazard Response Information System
b. Hamilton and Hardy, Industrial Toxicology
*c. Sax, Dangerous Properties of Industrial Materials
d. Patty, Industrial Hygiene and Toxicology
e. ACGIH, Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and
Physical Agents in the Workroom Equipment
f. Miedl, Hazardous Materials Handbook
g. Hauley, Condensed Chemical Dictionary
h. The Merck Index
i. CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics
*j. NFPA Hazardous Materials Manual
*k. JRB Associates, Methodology for Rating the Hazard Potential
of Waste Disposal Sites
*These are the only reference documents recognized as having
accepted toxicity values.
6. Consult Industrial Processes References
-------
TABLE 2
SOURCES OF INFORMATION FOR IDENTIFICATION OF
POLLUTANT DISPOSAL PATHWAYS
1. Geological Data
a. USGS Topographic Maps (Identifies surface drainage features)
b. Other USGA Publications (Geological and water resources)
c. State Geological Survey Offices
d. USDA Soil Conservation
2. Hydrology
a. USGS Water Resources Reports
b. State Water Resource Division
c. Flood Insurance Rate Maps from US Dept of Housing and Urban
Development (or local insurance agency)
3. Aerial Imagery
a. EPA Sources
1. Environmental Photographic Interpretation Center (EPIC)
in East
2. Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory (EMSL) in
West
b. National Cartographic Information Center (NCIC) photos
collected from NASA, USOA, USGS, NDAA and National Archives
c. Local Planning Agencies
4. National Weather Service publications (rainfall, etc.)
5. EPA Site Reports
A3
-------
TABLE 3
SOURCES OF INFORMATION FOR RECEPTOR CHARACTERIZATION
1. Maps and Aerial Photographs
a. USGS
b. State Department of Transportation
c. Local Planning Groups
d. Utility Companies (right-of-way maps)
e. County Road Commissions
2. Local Water Departments
3. US Public Health Service files and publications
4. County Agricultural Extension Offices
5. Federal and State Fish and Wildlife Departments
6. Local Universities
7. Local Naturalists
8. Medical Reports
9. Local Newspapers
10. Local well drillers
A4
-------
APPENDIX B
-------
SAMPLE PLAN
I. INTRODUCTION
A brief paragraph citing authorities and reasons for developing
this plan.
II. OBJECTIVES
Delineate, by item, the proposed objectives of the SI. Be sure
to address each phase of the SI and its reason including air, soil,
surface and ground water sampling as appropriate.
III. SITE DESCRIPTION
Describe the size and location of the site. Provide the legal
description of the site by Section, Range and Township as well as
latitude and longitude. Also provide a summary of the geology and
hydrology of the area. This section should also include any use of
the aquifer, any environmental sensitive areas, etc.
LV. FIELD PROCEDURES
Describe the field operations planned including: Concept of
Operations, Sampling Locations, Coordinating instructions, Site
Safety plan, Project schedule, Personnel requirments and duties and
Control of Contaminated materials. A table should be included show-
ing samples, locations and rationale for that sample.
V. LOGISTICS
Discuss how the personnel and equipment will get to and from the
site. A description of how samples will be delivered to the lab as
well as what laboratory will be used should also be included.
-------
VI. QUALITY CONTROL
The plan should provide a discussion of quality control proce-
dures to be implemented in the following areas: Sample Methods;
Sample Preservation, and Containers; Equipment Decontamination and
Chain of Custody.
VII. SAMPLING REPORT
Describe what the final report will contain, who will receive
copies of it, where copies may be obtained and procedures required to
obtain copies. Include the date the report will be available.
-------
-------
SAMPLE PLAN DEVELOPMENT
I. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this section is to acquaint the reader with the
procedures necessary to develop a detailed sampling plan for Site
Inspection (Si).
II. PURPOSE AND OBJECTIVES OF THE SITE INSPECTION
A. PURPOSE
The purpose of the SI is to characterize the problems present at
a potential or identified hazardous waste site. The primary objective
of an SI is to generate a sufficient data base to compute a site
score, under the Hazard Ranking System (HRS). Site-specific informa-
tion collected during the SI will update or confirm information that
was presented in the Preliminary Assessment. The site visit may
include the collection of sufficient samples to verify that a hazar-
dous waste control problem exists.
B. OBJECTIVES
The objectives of a site inspection include one or more of the
fol lowing:
o to confirm preliminary assessment data that is otherwise
poorly substantiated;
o to obtain data that was unavailable during the preliminary
assessment;
o to update site conditions, if there are indications that
changes may have occurred at the site; and/or
o to obtain data necessary to conduct an HRS ranking or plan a
field investigation.
-------
It is important to provide analytical evidence that a significant
hazardous substance control problem exists at a specific site, so that
HRS ranking and/or more detailed SI follow-up can be developed to
fully characterize such pollution sources. To accomplish this objec-
tive, the site inspection includes biased sampling of limited on-site
locations to demonstrate that hazardous materials are present, and
biased sampling of off-site locations to demonstrate the migration of
such wastes.
III. SCOPE OF WORK
The site inspection is not an intensive, complete environmental
assessment. Rather, it is a limited, quickly implemented effort.
Site Inspection activities are restricted to:
o field measurement of ambient conditions (background);
o documentation of observations regarding conditions at the site
or at sample collection locations; and
o collection of environmental grab samples and samples from
waste spillage, open containers, waste pits, and lagoons.
Specifically excluded from site inspection activities are
enforcement-related studies (but enforcement procedures should be
followed), geophysical testing (with the exception of metal detectors
or proton magnetometer surveys), ground water monitoring well instal-
lation (unless the state has a drill rig), and all other activities
that require detailed background investigation or specialized tech-
niques. Finally, studies aimed at identifying the extent of contami-
nation, rather than its existence, are beyond the scope of a site
inspection.
IV. HRS SAMPLING STRATEGY
To insure that necessary HRS ranking data is collected, a
sampling plan must be developed for each site to be inspected. The
sampling plan should be developed to insure that:
-------
o off-site sample locations target the maximum route population
and/or sensitive environments exposed to the site
o appropriate background samples, both in type and number, are
collected to confirm a release
o if no documentation exists regarding waste characteristics,
discrete samples positively identifying pollutant sources are
collected
o on-site sampling (medium and high hazard) is minimized with
priority being given to:
- liquids, gases and sludges;
- powders or fine materials;
- unconsolidated or unstabilized solids
o verify, document and sample, if possible, the least secure
pathway to surface and/or ground water
o water samples are prioritized as follows:
- drinking water;
- irrigation, fisheries, food preparation, and/or recrea-
tional; and
- commercial or industrial.
V. PRELIMINARY SI ACTIVITIES
A. ASSIGN PROJECT MANAGER
Each site should be assigned to a particular individual. This
person will serve as the project manager throughout the entire SI.
B. BACKGROUND COLLECTION
Planning for a site inspection begins with the collection and
review of pertinent available data regarding the site. The background
data review of such information serves to establish the specific site
inspection needs and to identify missing elements to be determined at
the site.
-------
C. PROBLEM DEFINITION
At this stage, a preliminary HRS score should be done to see
what impact the site has and to get an idea of how sampling will be
effective. This preliminary ranking will allow Sis to be prioritized
based on apparent hazards. The site inspection is usually the first
phase of site characterization that involves site contact.
Consequently, it generates a need for consideration of site safety for
investigative personnel. After reviewing the background information
available for the site, the project manager must determine the types
of equipment that will be needed to provide adequate dermal
protection, repiratory protection, and protection from mechanical
injury for the team. This information will be incorporated into the
sampling plan when it is written.
If potential hazardous substances at the site have been identi-
fied, the project manager can assemble information on the substance,
determine the physical state of the substance likely to be be
encountered, and then choose the appropriate protective clothing and
respiratory protection. Sites that require no more than Level D pro-
tection may be inspected by as few as two persons. Any site requiring
the wearing of respiratory protection (Level C, B, and A) will neces-
sitate at least three team members: two inspectors "downrange" utiliz-
ing the buddy system, and at least one inspector upwind in the support
area as a safety observer. If only three inspectors are present on a
Level C, B, or A site, the safety observer should not enter the exclu-
sion area (go downrange) to effect a rescue of the two inspectors.
They must extract themselves.
A preliminary hazard evaluation is necessary to determine the
equipment and manpower needs for the site inspection.
Often there is not enough background information available to
make a decision regarding the level of personal protection that will
be necessary. In such instances, the team must be prepared to use the
highest level of respiratory protection for at least the initial
-------
entry during site inspections. This usually means a self-contained
breathing apparatus (SCBA) with appropriate dermal protection. If,
after arriving at the site, the project manager and site safety
coordinator can determine that the site does not pose the potential
dangers originally assumed, the level of protection may be downgraded
to a lower level.
VI. SAMPLING RATIONAL
A. INTRODUCTION
The preliminary activities should have provided the following
site-specific information:
o types of hazardous materials expected to be at the site, such
as organic solvents, pesticides, heavy metals, etc.,
o probable locations of these materials (soil, surface water,
ground water, or air),
o potential off-site migration routes, and
o potential sampling locations.
The project manager must now begin to formulate the types and
number of samples necessary to fulfill the SI and HRS requirements.
The project manager must also determine the appropriate parameters for
the samples collected. Information developed during this phase will
be incorporated into the sampling plan. Sources of information to
assist these decisions are provided in Appendix A, Table 1.
B. ENVIRONMENTAL PATHWAYS
Hazardous wastes will segregate into one, two or all three avail-
able environmental pathways (air, water or soil) based on the physical
and chemical characteristics of the materials. Examples of this
segregation include:
-------
o Organic solvents are volatile, water soluble to some degree
and may bind to soils. Consequently, they would be expected
in all environmental pathways.
o Heavy metals may be water soluble and may be spread by eolian
forces. They would be routinely expected in soil and water
pathways; however, breezy conditions can induce short term
severe impacts.
o Pesticides tend to bind to soils and would exhibit short term
air impacts during application and/or windy conditions. Many
of these materials photo degrade at the soil surface but may
persist at depths of 6 inches or more.
To provide sufficient data for HRS ranking, it is critical to
have background samples. These are from areas expected to be unaffec-
ted by the waste site. Background samples must be collected from each
environmental pathway for which contaminant samples are collected.
Table 2 in Appendix A provides a list which aids in selecting loca-
tions for sample collections for background and off-site sampling.
Off-site sampling locations, selected to show off-site migration,
should be selected to emphasize the threat to local populations or
sensitive environments. Table 3 in Appendix A provides some aids to
assist in selecting such sampling locations.
The project manager needs to relay information concerning the
final decisions on type, number and parameters of samples to the
laboratory coordinator. The lab coordinator will then provide this
information and anticipated dates for sampling and shipping to the
analytical laboratories or the Sample Management Office.
Such planning of sample numbers and locations allows the project
manager to assess the equipment needs to conduct the SI.
Once the level of protection has been determined and the number
and types of samples and field measurements have been decided upon,
the project manager should make sure that there will be enough equip-
ment to complete the scope of work in a safe and timely manner.
-------
Manpower needs will depend on all of the following considera-
tions: the necessary level of protection; sampling and field measure-
ment requirements, and the amount of equipment that must be carried
on-site. Even at a Level D site, a two-person team will find it
difficult to carry all the equipment that wil be needed to complete
the work. Sometimes, it is necessary to increase the number of per-
sonnel at a site just to carry all the instruments that are required
and to perform the necessary monitoring tasks.
VII. SAMPLING PLAN
Site inspections require a work plan which describes the scope of
work and details the methodologies and safety procedures to be
followed. A work plan can be adjusted to suit the activities of the
specific investigation, but it should always contain the following
eleraents:
o A summary of background information on the site and a refer-
ence to legal authority to perform Site Inspections.
o A statement of objectives and goals of the investigation.
Typical investigation goals include hazardous substance inven-
tory and documentation of pollutant migration.
o Investigation methods required to characterize the site. This
includes a sampling plan that indicates sample types, sampling
locations, sampling procedures, and field quality control.
o Personnel requirements.
o Equipment needs.
o A safety plan.
o Any nonstandard equipment or contract services which may be
needed to complete the investigation.
o Methods used to control contaminated materials, including
decontamination procedures, solutions to be used, and storage
or disposal requirements including RCRA manifest number for
removal if designated hazardous.
o Special training requirements.
o Organization of special teams.
-------
As this list indicates, the work plan allows the investigation
team to efficiently schedule such resources as manpower, equipment,
and laboratory services (in-house or contract) in advance of an
investigation. The work plan is thus an essential tool in the inves-
tigation of hazardous substance sites. A descriptive outline of the
sampling plan elements is provided in Appendix B.
-------
SECTION 1
SAMPLE COLLECTION TECHNIQUES
1.1 INTRODUCTION
Currently, there are few publications providing guidance specifical-
ly directed to sampling at hazardous substance sites. The sampling pro-
cedures outlined in this manual are adaptations of methods which are
described in a variety of publications. The publications most directly
applicable to sampling at hazardous substance sites include the follow-
ing:
(1) Enforcement Considerations for Evaluations of Uncontrolled Haz-
ardous Waste Sites by Contractors (NEIC, 1980)
(2) Samplers and Sampling Procedures for Hazardous Waste Streams
(MERL, 1980)
(3) Procedure Manual for Groundwater Monitoring at Solid Waste
Disposal Facilities (EPA, 1977)
(4) Field Monitoring and Analysis of Hazardous Materials (E RT,
1980)
The objective of sampling is to acquire data which will assist in-
vestigative personnel in determining:
(1) The identification of the hazardous substances present at a
site and
(2) The occurrence and extent of hazardous substance migration.
Also, the data generated from analysis of samples often provides a
crucial portion of the evidence used in subsequent litigation and may
further be used in the development of appropriate remedial action alter-
natives. Therefore, the design of the sampling operation must ensure
1-1
-------
that the samples obtained will meet the goals of the investigation.
Careful selection of sampling locations and methods also helps reduce the
costs of labor and analytical support.
1.2 SAMPLING STRATEGY
Hazardous substance sites normally are sampled to provide data for
HRS, support enforcement, or characterize the site for remedial work.
These tasks entail different sampling goals and strategies.
For enforcement alone it is not necessary to identify all of the
site's hazardous substances or areas of migration. The general strategy
is to sample those areas or containers most likely to give positive
evidence of the most hazardous contamination or chemical suspected to be
present. Likewise, to demonstrate off-site migration, those areas where
off-site migration is most probable are sampled first. Thus, containers
to be sampled for evidence of hazardous chemical presence are generally
selected on the basis of drum markings or other information indicating
hazardous contents. Stream sediments are sampled in locations of heavy
stream deposition, and stream water samples are collected nearest the
point of suspected contaminant entry. Therefore, a biased sampling
approach is used for legal support. This approach is contrary to most
established sampling procedures which stress the importance of selecting
sampling points without bias.
For site investigations in support of remedial design, thoroughness
in total site characterization is desirable. In such cases, statistical-
ly acceptable random sampling techniques should be used if possible to
minimize sample numbers. Portions of this discussion will describe
applicable random sample selection procedures and the references provide
further guidance.
1.3 TYPES OF SAMPLES FOR FIELD INVESTIGATIONS
1.3.1 Environmental Samples
Environmental samples are normally dilute and do not require the
special shipping procedures used with concentrated samples (Section 6).
If there is reason to believe that particular environmental samples are
concentrated or particularly hazardous for any other reason, they should
be shipped as hazardous samples.
1-2
-------
1.3.2 Hazardous Samples, Excluding Those Taken From Closed Containers
These include on-site samples obtained from surface impoundments
(lagoons), pits, waste piles and containers, including drums, tanks and
tank cars. Based upon the best professional judgement of field person-
nel, these types of samples may be sub-categorized as either high- or
medium-concentration samples.
High-concentration hazardous samples include all samples that have
no obvious and significant dilution with water, soil, or any other non-
toxic component. Generally these samples are from containers or fresh
spills. Obtaining these samples poses the greatest risk of exposure to
personnel. In addition, U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) regula-
tions require that the samples be shipped under "worst case" conditions.
The samples should be conveyed to a regulated substances laboratory where
they may be safely prepared for further analysis. (See Section 6.)
Medium concentration hazardous samples are environmental samples
suspected of being heavily contaminated because they are discolored,
turbid, odorous, or from a location suspected to be highly concentrated
(spill location). These samples are shipped in the same manner as high
concentration samples, but should be analyzed only in an environmental
laboratory equipped with an OSHA-approved carcinogen glove box (Policy of
EPA for contract laboratories).
1.3.3 Hazardous Samples Taken From Closed Containers
These samples must be shipped to a regulated substances laboratory
for preparation prior to analysis. EPA maintains such a laboratory at
the National Enforcement Investigations Center (NEIC) in Denver,
Colorado, which may be consulted for guidance. Currently, shipment must
be according to DOT regulations for "Poison A" substances, unless avail-
able information clearly excludes the possibility of the presence of a
"Poison A" substance.
1.4 GENERAL SAMPLING TECHNIQUES
Two types of sampling techniques are generally recognized: grab
sampling and composite sampling (See Sections 2, 3, and 5 for specific
applications). A grab sample is taken over a short period of time,
1-3
-------
generally less than 15 minutes. Grab sampling is used to characterize a
waste or waste stream at a given time. Grab sampling is frequently
employed for hazardous substance site investigations.
A composite sample is a combination of individual samples taken over
a prolonged period of time at the same sampling point. This technique is
not frequently used in hazardous site investigations; however, a modifi-
cation of composite sampling may be used in certain instances. This
modification involves combining samples taken at different locations
(pond, lagoon, etc.) into one sample. This provides a sample composited
by location rather than time and may provide useful data on the average
concentration of contaminants or the presence or absence of hazardous
substances in the area.
1.5 THE SAMPLING PLAN
As part of the work plan for a field investigation that involves
sampling, a sampling plan should be developed that includes the types- and
number of samples to be taken and the potential locations of sampling
points. It is recommended that a brief rationale be written for each
selected type of sample and sampling point chosen. This process will
help focus the sample selection on the objective of the field investiga-
tion and will help investigators select those points likely to be repre-
sentative of hazardous conditions. The importance of using all back-
ground information available to assist in the development of the plan
cannot be stressed enough.
The sampling plan should address, but not necessarily be limited to,
the following elements:
(1) Team organization.
(2) Degree of protective clothing and equipment required. Deter-
mined by the potential for exposure and the hazardous nature of
the suspected contaminants.
(3) Number of samples to be taken. In general, a small number of
samples is required to establish contaminant concentration
ranges. Other factors affecting the number of samples required
include the area of the site and sampling goals. Table 1-1
1-4
-------
provides some guidelines for onsite sample numbers. Average
concentrations are sufficient for enforcement cases, while con-
centration ranges are necessary for remedial work.
(4) Selection of background sampling points. Sampling points be-
yond the limits of site contamination, e.g., upwind ambient air
samples or upstream surface water samples, should be identi-
fied. This is essential in enforcement cases in order to docu-
ment environmental quality in the immediate vicinity that has
not been affected by contaminants on the site.
(5) Sampling containers, preservation techniques, sample obtain-
ing equipment and field measurement devices. See Sections 2,
3, and 5.
(6) Sample documentation. The sample tags, chain-of-custody forms,
field logbooks and photographic equipment necessary to document
the sampling process should be prepared. Also, preparation
should be made to split samples with site/facility representa-
tives if required.
(7) Analytical support. The analyses which will be requested for
the samples, based on background information, should be identi-
fied, and the laboratory facilities which will receive the sam-
ples should be notified.
(8) Quality control. The sampling points where duplicate samples
will be taken for quality control should be identified, and
field blanks should be prepared.
(9) Sample packaging and shipping. See Section 6.
1.6 DATA ANALYSIS
The evaluation of analytical data generated from sampling operations
during field investigations requires the integration of a variety of fac-
tors which may influence the validity or value of the data.
1-5
-------
TABLE 1-1
NUMBER OF SAMPLES TO BE COLLECTED (MERL, 1980)
Case
No.
Information
Desired
Waste
Type
Container
Type
Number of Samples
To Be Collected
9
10
Average
Concentration
Average
Concentration
Average
Concentrat ion
Average
Concentration
Average
Concentration
Concentration
Range
Concentration
Range
Concentration
Range
Concentration
Range
Concentrat ion
Range
Liquid
Liquid
Solid
(powder or
granular)
Waste
pile
Soil
Liquid
Liquid
Solid
(powder or
granular)
Waste
pile
Soil
Drum, vacuum truck
and similar con-
tainers
Pond, pit, lagoon
1 combined sample
of several samples
collected at dif-
ferent sampling
points or levels
Bag, drum, bin, sack Same as Case
Same as Case #2
1 combined sample
of several samples
collected at dif-
erent sampling
areas
3 to 10 separate
samples, each fron
a different depth
of the liquid
3 to 20 separate
samples from
different sampling
points and depths
3 to 5 samples
from different
sampling points
Same as Case #8
Drum, vacuum,
truck, storage
tank
Ponds, pit, lagoon
Bag, drum, bin
3 to 20 separate
samples from dif-
ferent sampling
11 Average Con- All
centration for Types
legal evidence
12 Average Liquid
Concentration
13 Average Liquid
Concentration
All containers
Storage tank
Storage tank
3 identical
samples or 1
combined sample
divided into 3
identical samples
if homogeneous
Same as Case #6
Same as Case #6
1-6
-------
The internal quality control standards utilized by laboratories in
monitoring their analyses are beyond the scope of field investigation
personnel function and is therefore not addressed here. However, assum-
ing that the data is sound from an analytical point of view, field inves-
tigation personnel are tasked to assimilate this data with all of the
other information available about a site in order to determine the status
of a site. Suggested factors to be considered in data analysis should
include, but not be limited to, the following:
(1) The date of analysis should be compared with the date of sam-
pling. Degradation of chemical contaminants in samples over
time has been documented.
(2) Duplicate/blank sample results should be examined to help iden-
tify contamination problems with sampling technique and equip-
ment including sample containers.
(3) If samples have been split and analyzed by two different labs,
the resulting data should be compared.
(4) Background data taken from upwind, upstream, or upgradient
should be examined carefully to establish identity and concen-
trations of contaminants in the environment prior to contact
with the site.
(5) Comparison of on-site concentrations to downwind, downstream,
and down-gradient off-site concentrations should be used with
available topographical, geohydrological and meteorological
data to link on-site substances to off-site contamination.
(6) Evaluate sample handling procedures for proper preservation
techniques, e.g., acidification of samples for metal analysis.
(7) Evaluate climatic factors at sampling time. A wide variety of
factors such as temperature, rainfall, wind direction and velo-
city affect the concentrations of contaminants. Variation in
these conditions can produce variation in actual concentrations
found.
1-7
-------
(8) If trace quantities of contaminants are found in a sample, the
sampling point should be evaluated in terms of the physical and
chemical properties of that contaminant. For example, if a
surface sample from a lagoon shows trace heavy metal concentra-
tions, the conclusion would be that higher concentrations might
be found if a greater depth is chosen for the sampling point
because of low water solubility of heavy metals.
(9) Careful examination of field data measurements relative to the
sampling points and analytical results can provide key informa-
tion about contaminant plume migration.
-------
REFERENCES - SECTION 1
Environmental Response Team, 1980. Field Monitoring and Analysis of
Hazardous Materials. EPA Training Manual, Course #165.4, Cincinnati,
Ohio.
Environmental Protection Agency, 1973. Handbook for Monitoring Indus-
trial Wastewater. U.S. EPA Technology Transfer.
Environmental Protection Agency, 1974. Methods for Chemical Analysis of
Water and Wastewater. U.S. EPA Technology Transfer.
Environmental Protection Agency. Handbook for Analytical Quality Con-
trol in Water and Wastewater Laboratories. U.S. EPA-600/4-79-019.
Environmental Protection Agency, 1977. Procedures Manual for Ground-
water Monitoring at Solid Waste Disposal Facilities. EPA/530/SW-611.
Huibregtse, K. R. , and Moser, J. H. , 1976. Handbook for Sampling and
Sample Preservation of Water and Wastewater. U.S. EPA-600/4-76-049.
Municipal Environmental Research Laboratory, 1980. Samplers and Sam-
pling Procedures for Hazardous Waste Streams. Environmental Protection
Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio. EPA-600/280-018.
National Enforcement Investigations Center, 1980. Enforcement Considera-
tions for Evaluations of Uncontrolled Hazardous Waste Sites by Contrac-
tors . EPA Office of Enforcement, Denver, Colorado.
Olson, D. M. , Berg, E. L. , Christensen, R. , Otto, H. , Ciancia, J.,
Bryant, G., Lair, M.D., Birch, M., Keffer, W., Dahl , T., and Wehner, T. ,
1977. Compliance Sampling Manual. Enforcement Division, Office of Water
Enforcement, Compliance Branch.
Weber, C. I., 1973. Biological Field and Laboratory Methods for Measur-
ing the Quality of Surface Waters and Effluents. U.S. EPA-670/4-73-001.
1-9
-------
REFERENCES - SECTION 3
Municipal Environmental Research Laboratory,
pling Procedures for Hazardous Waste Streams.
Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio. EPA-600/280-018.
1980. Samplers and Sam-
Environmental Protection
National Enforcement Investigations Center, 1980. Enforcement Consi-
derations for Evaluations of Uncontrolled Hazardous Waste Sites by Con-
tractors . EPA Office of Enforcement, Denver, Colorado.
3-9
-------
SECTION 2
WATER SAMPLING METHODS FOR FIELD INVESTIGATIONS
2.1 GENERAL
The sampling and analysis of surface water and groundwater are major
focal points for a large number of field investigations of hazardous sub-
stance sites. In some cases, the analysis of a sample taken off-site may
be the initial indicator that the site is a pollution source. Once the
substances associated with the site have been characterized in a prelimi-
nary assessment or from analysis of samples taken on-site (See Section
5), surface water and groundwater samples may be necessary to help estab-
lish the existence and extent of contaminant migration. Such data helps
investigators identify populations at risk and determine appropriate
remedial actions.
Surface water and groundwater samples are usually considered envi-
ronmental samples, as defined in Section 1. There are instances, how-
ever, when surface water and groundwater samples may be more highly con-
centrated, even to the degree that they may be considered hazardous sam-
ples. The site entry team leader or project manager must decide how such
samples should be handled. Visual indicators of high concentrations in-
clude coloration, turbidity, odor, multiphasic layering and spontaneous
formation of precipitates. Field instruments should also be used for
this evaluation.
2.2 CONTAINERS, CLEANING OF CONTAINERS AND SAMPLE PRESERVATION
For surface water and groundwater samples, the same containers, con-
tainer cleaning and preservation methods are employed. The chemical con-
stituent for which the samples will be analyzed determines the method
used. Ideally, background information will limit analytical requests to
a few chemicals or chemical groups.
In the absence of such information, the most commonly requested
analyses are for the substances on the Environmental Protection Agency's
Priority Pollutant list. This list includes 129 substances which are
2-1
-------
used in a wide range of industrial applications and whose presence in the
environment has been linked to health-related effects and overall water
quality deterioration. Of the total, 30 are classified as purgeable or
volatile organic compounds, which are removed from a water sample by bub-
bling an inert gas through the sample; 83 are classified as extract-
able organic compounds, which are removed from a water sample by the use
of an organic solvent (this includes 47 base/neutral extractables, 11
acid extractables, and 26 pesticides/PCB1s); 13 are metallic elements;
and two are "miscellaneous" —total cyanides and asbestos. A list of the
priority pollutants and the EPA approved analytical methods are found in
the Federal Register, Vol. 44, No. 233, Monday, Dec. 3, 1979. Other
analyses may be requested as site-specific information becomes available.
The priority pollutants typically are also analyzed for in soil, sediment
and hazardous samples.
Table 2-1 specifies the recommended type and size of containers,
number of containers, sample volumes, container cleaning, and sample pre-
servation and holding time for the analytical needs for most hazardous
substance site investigations. The specifications listed are recommended
by the EPA National Enforcement Investigations Center (NEIC, 1980).
Where no specific container cleaning instructions are listed, the con-
tainers should at a minimum be washed with detergent and rinsed with
copious amounts of distilled water.
It is important to determine the limitations of the analytical
laboratory to which samples are being shipped. The laboratory should be
aware of the bottle preparation procedures, preservatives used, and data
on how the sample was collected. (The analytical laboratory chosen
should also be able to provide further guidance on container cleaning.)
The types of analyses listed in Table 2-1 include those which are
most likely to be requested during an investigation of an uncontrolled
hazardous substance site. If background information indicates that other
analyses may be needed, the nearest regulatory agency laboratory of con-
cern should be consulted. Also, the holding times are merely guidelines.
The samples should be conveyed to the analytical laboratory as soon as
possible, especially if they are necessary evidence to support legal
action on the site.
2-2
-------
2-1
RECOMMENDED SAMPLE HANDLING
TYPE OE
ANALYSIS
Purge able
(Volatile)
Ortjanics
Extract able
Organics, PCB,
Pesticides
Metals
Cyanides
Total Organic
Carbon
Ammonia
Fluoride
Sulfide
TYPE AND SIZE
OF CONTAINER
40 ml glass
vial, Teflon-
backed septum
One-half gallon
bottles with
Teflon-lined caps
1 liter poly-
ethylene bottle
with polyethylene-
lined cape
1 liter poly-
ethylene bottle
with polyethylene-
lined caps
500 ml polyethylene
bottle
500 ml polyethylene
bottle
500 ml polyethylene
bottle
1 liter poly-
ethylene bottle
NUMBER OF CONTAINERS
AND SAMPLE VOLUME
(PER SAMPLE)
Two; vials filled
completely, no air
space
Two; total volume
approx. 1 gallon;
Fill bottles 5/6
full
One; bottle is
filled 7/8 full
One; bottle is
filled 7/8 full
One; bottle is
filled 7/8 full
One; bottle is
filled 7/8 full
One; bottle is
filled 7/8 full
One; bottle is
filled 7/8 full
CONTAINER CLEANING
Bottles and septa
washed with deter-
gent, rinsed with
organic-free water
and dried an hour
at 1050 c
Bottles and cap
liners rinsed with
methylene chloride
and dried by vacuum
or other aafe means
until no solvent
remains
Bottles are rinsed
with dilute nitric
acid and washed well
with distilled or
deionized water
»
*
*
*
*
PRESERVATION
Cool to 40 c
(ice in cooler)
Cool to 4° c
(ice in cooler)
Nitric acid to
below pH of 2
(approx. 1 .5 ml
Con HN03
per liter)
Sodium hydroxide
to pH 12 and
cool to 4° Q
(ice in cooler)
Sulfuric acid to
pH below 2 and
cool to 40p
(ice in cooler)
Sulfuric acid to
pH below 2 and
cool to 4o c
(ice in cooler)
Cool to 4o c
(ice in cooler)
0.04S zinc
acetate
MAXIMUM HOLDING
TIME
14 Days
Must be extracted
within 7 days
6 Months
24 Hours
7 Days
Unstable
7 Days
7 Days
•No specific instructions. At a minimum, wash containers with detergent and rinse with distilled water.
-------
2.3 SURFACE WATER SAMPLING
2.3.1 Sampling Locations
Surface water sampling locations are selected on the basis of the
probability they will show contaminants migrating from a site. Prior to
sampling, the surface water drainage in and around a site should be char-
acterized using all available background information, including topo-
graphic maps and river basin studies. Air photos may be used to develop
drainage maps which can then be confirmed by initial survey of the sur-
face water adjacent to or on a site. An initial survey of potential sam-
pling points is essential to the development of a sampling plan. Fur-
ther, it is possible to anticipate any special equipment or personnel
safety requirements which might be necessitated by terrain or other fac-
tors. The initial survey also allows field personnel to identify land-
marks which locate sampling points—a crucial step in maintaining docu-
mentation of activities for legal actions.
In general, sampling locations would include rivers, brooks or
streams running through or adjacent to a site, including those bodies of
water which may receive surface runoff or leachate from a site. Discre-
tion is advised in sampling leachate breakouts, which may have high con-
centrations of contaminants.
Leachate is formed by the mixing of rain water with wastes buried in
the ground. The leachate may then enter groundwater, where it may remain
below the ground's surface. In areas where the ground surface slopes
steeply away from the buried wastes, the leachate may "break out" or
emerge on the ground surface. This is referred to as a leachate breakout
and is typically encountered at landfills. Samples taken from leachate
streams may have to be treated as medium or high concentration samples
depending upon a field evaluation.
Other surface water sampling locations would include any adjacent
standing bodies of water such as ponds, lakes or swamps which might be
receiving contaminants. (Again, care must be taken in judging the nature
of samples taken from on-site surface impoundments if high concentrations
are indicated. )
It is also essential to establish the quality of water prior to its
contact with the site. Surface drainage patterns should be carefully
studied to determine background sampling locations. A minimum of one
2-4
-------
upstream sample is required for streams, although a background sample
should be taken from each upstream surface water source. For standing
bodies of water, a background sample may be obtained from a similar water
body away from the suspected point-source discharge.
The number of sampling locations is dependent on a variety of fac-
tors, including the size of a site, the availability of analytical sup-
port, and the objectives of the investigation. A recommended absolute
minimum would be two locations, including one background location.
Ideally, additional locations should be sampled, with some locations
selected for taking a duplicate sample, which improves the quality con-
trol of the analytical data.
2.3.2 Field Measurements and Observations
While sampling points are being located, several quick field mea-
surements and observations should be made to help in interpreting the
analytical data. The following are suggested field measurements which
should be noted in the sampler's field logbook:
(1) Water temperature at point and time of sampling.
(2) pH of water sampled. This measurement is made using a pH meter
or indicator paper in a separate sample collected for this pur-
pose. Do not risk contaminating a sample or losing volatiles
by immersing the pH electrode into a sample which is to be sent
out for analysis.
(3) Dissolved oxygen content of water sampled. Use a portable dis-
solved oxygen meter.
(4) Depth of stream or pond (average). This may be limited to
estimates, especially if access is restricted to the shoreline.
If using a sounding device, such as a graduated pole, perform
this after the samples have been obtained.
(5) Velocity of stream. This can be approximated by estimating the
velocity of a floating object. Perform this measurement after
samples are obtained.
2-5
-------
(6) Flow rate of stream. Estimate cross-sectional area from depth
and width of stream. The cross-sectional area may be estimated
by assuming that it is a triangle and using the formula A =
(1/2) BC, where:
A = cross-sectional area
B = width of stream
C = depth of stream at deepest point
Multiply this area by velocity for a rough approximation of
flow rate.
Some suggested observations to record before and during the sampling
operation include the following:
(1) Overall weather conditions at the time of sampling. Include
air temperature, sky condition, any recent heavy rainfall or
drought conditions which might affect contaminant migration,
flow rates, etc.
(2) Observable physical characteristics such as odor, color, and
turbidity.
(3) Stream characteristics such as stagnation or mixing which might
affect the distribution or volatilization of contaminants in
the water.
(4) Evidence of dead vegetation or animals.
2.3.3 Sampling Equipment
For hazardous substance site investigations, the equipment needed
for surface water sampling is minimal. In most instances, the sample
container serves as the sampling device. The use of highly sophisticated
or automatic sampling devices is normally not required for hazardous site
investigations.
Table 2-2 is a suggested list of surface water sampling equipment
and accessories. Field personnel are encouraged to draw upon their own
2-6
-------
TABLE 2-2
SURFACE WATER SAMPLING EQUIPMENT
EQUIPMENT
Sample containers
Sample preservatives
Coolers with ice
Field blanks
Telescoping aluminum pole with
clamp & Teflon beaker
Thermometer
Portable pH meter
Portable dissolved oxygen meter
Field logbook
Camera/film
Sample tags
Chain-of-custody records
Receipt for sample forms
Ink pen (waterproof)
USE
Appropriate to analysis desired (See
Table 2-1).
See Table 2-1.
Used for preserving, shipping samples.
One is recommended for each group of ten
samples. These are prepared for the
desired analysis in the same type of con-
tainer as the sample, and preserved and
handled in the same manner in the field.
For organics analysis, use organic-free
water. For inorganics analysis, use de-
ionized or distilled water.
Used to extend reach and depth so that wa-
ter samples can be safely taken from the
shore of a stream or pond. Rinse thorough-
ly between use to avoid contamination of
samples.
Measure water and air temperature.
Measure pH of water at time of sampling.
Measure dissolved oxygen.
Record field observations.
Document sampling activity.
Sample documentation.
2-7
-------
experience and creativity to supplement this list. As a general precau-
tion, any newly obtained container or sampling device must be thoroughly
cleaned prior to use and between sample locations to avoid contamination.
It is also recommended that devices or containers for samples for organic
compound analysis be fabricated from glass, Teflon, or stainless steel.
These materials may also be present in sampling devices used to obtain
samples for metals analysis.
2.3.4 Surface Water Sampling Techniques
Most samples taken during site investigations are grab samples (See
Section 1). Typically, surface water sampling involves immersing the
sample container in the body of water; however, the following suggestions
are made to help ensure that the samples obtained are representative of
site conditions:
(1) The most representative samples in a well-mixed stream are
obtained from mid-channel at 0.6 stream depth.
(2) Stagnated areas or pools in a stream or river might contain
zones of varying pollutant concentrations, depending upon the
physical/chemical properties of the contaminants and the posi-
tion of these stagnated areas relative to the site.
(3) Even though the containers used to obtain the samples are pre-
viously laboratory cleaned, it is suggested that the sample
container be rinsed at least once with the water to be sampled
before the sample is taken.
(4) For sampling running water, the farthest downstream sample
should be obtained first, and subsequent samples should be
taken as one works upstream. This avoids contaminating samples
by raising the stream turbidity levels. Work from zones sus-
pected of low contamination to zones of high contamination.
(5) To sample a pond or other standing body of water, the surface
area may be divided into grids. A series of'samples taken from
each grid is combined into one sample, or several grids are
selected at random.
2-8
-------
(6) Care should be taken to avoid excessive agitation of the water
since this results in the loss of volatile constituents.
(7) When obtaining samples in 40 ml septum vials for volatile or-
ganics analysis, it is important to exclude any air space in
the top of the bottle and to be sure that the Teflon liner
faces in after the bottle is filled and capped. The bottle can
be turned upside down to check for air bubbles.
(8) Do not sample at the surface, unless sampling specifically for
a known constituent which is immiscible and on top of the
water. Instead, the sample container should be inverted, low-
ered to the approximate depth, and held at about a 45-degree
angle with the mouth of the bottle facing upstream.
2.4 GROUNDWATER SAMPLING
2.4.1 Sampling Locations
Groundwater sampling locations are determined by the location of
existing wells. It is important that the installation of any new wells
be under the direction of an experienced hydrogeologist.
The obvious groundwater sampling locations are those monitoring
wells, residential wells, and industrial wells which are adjacent to a
site. Many landfills typically have monitoring wells in place, and most
residences in rural areas lacking municipal water supplies have their own
wells. In urban areas, many industries whose processes require large
amounts of water have their own production wells, and many municipalities
rely upon large production wells. Additionally, monitoring wells have
been installed in areas where routine tests showed contamination of
municipal or industrial production wells, or where an aquifer was being
evaluated for future water supply development. Once again, the need for
an exhaustive background information search is stressed. The background
search helps identify wells near a site and can provide information about
the depth, diameter and use of the wells.
Existing monitoring wells should be sampled and analyzed first.
This will establish the nature of any contaminants in the groundwater and
assist in determining the need for additional well sampling. If analyti-
2-9
-------
cal data for the monitoring wells already exists, this should be evalu-
ated with the other site-specific information to determine the need for
sampling private wells farther away from the site. Existing data may
also enable the investigative team to key on a particular type of con-
taminant, and thus the amount of analytical support required can be
reduced.
Before monitoring wells at a hazardous substance site are sampled,
the placement of each well should be carefully evaluated for its poten-
tial of producing a highly concentrated sample. Such samples require
attention to personnel protection and may require the use of respirators.
Also, it may be necessary to ship concentrated samples to a laboratory
capable of handling hazardous samples.
It is important to locate a well or wells to provide a background
(upgradient) groundwater sample. This may be accomplished by studying
available hydrological data about the direction of groundwater flow near
a site, but may require the use of geophysical techniques and the instal-
lation of additional monitoring wells.
2.4.2 Field Measurements and Observations
The following field measurements and observations may prove useful
in preparing to sample and in interpreting the data from the subsequent
analyses.
(1) It should be noted if monitoring wells are locked. Arrange-
ments must be made to secure keys or to remove locks by other
means and re-secure the wells.
(2) The diameter of the wells should be noted to ensure that a
bailer of the proper size will be available. The diameter is
also necessary for calculating the wells' static water volume.
(3) The type of casing material should be noted, i.e., PVC, steel,
etc .
(4) For municipal or industrial production wells, information would
be obtained about the pumping rates, static level, and total
well depth. Such information is usually available from the
facility management.
2-10
-------
(5) For drilled or dug residential wells, little or no information
may be available, but an attempt should be made to obtain what
information there is.
(6) The overall weather conditions at the time of sampling should
be noted, including air temperature, sky condition, recent
heavy rainfall or drought conditions which might affect con-
taminant migration, etc.
(7) Note any observable physical characteristics of the groundwater
as it is being sampled, e.g., color, odor, turbidity.
(8) The elevation of the well casing should be determined from
background information or by field personnel. If there is a
sufficient amount of well data, it may be possible to construct
a groundwater contour map. If the construction/use of the well
permits, the static water level of each well should be measured
prior to sampling. This is best accomplished with the use of
an electronic water level indicator. Similarly, the total
depth of the well should be determined prior to sampling.
These measurements should be obtained whether or not well logs
are available since the measurements are required in calculat-
ing the static water volume of the well.
(9) Any observations about well-casing integrity (e.g., difficulty
lowering bailer because of bent casing) or disparities between
existing well logs and current field measurements should be
noted in a field logbook.
(10) The temperature of the water should be measured and recorded,
both at the time of initial purging of the well and at the time
of sampling. Groundwater temperatures are an indicator of the
degree of contamination. In addition, the pH and specific con-
ductivity of the groundwater being sampled should be measured.
(Because of possible contamination problems, measurements of
temperature, pH and specific conductivity should be carried out
on a portion of groundwater which is not in a sample container
to be sent out for analysis.)
2-11
-------
(11) If the monitoring wells or production wells being sampled have
been shown to be part of the same aquifer which is being pumped
by other production wells, this fact should be noted at the
time of sampling.
(12) Any surface water bodies which have been shown to be, or are
suspected to be, hydraulically connected with the wells being
sampled should be sampled at the same time.
2.4.3 Groundwater Sampling Equipment
Table 2-3 is a list of groundwater sampling equipment which is sug-
gested for sampling operations. The use of more sophisticated methods
and/or sampling equipment is beyond the scope of typical site investiga-
tions and is not addressed here. It is recommended that the equipment be
kept to a minimum, since the access to many wells may be difficult.
2.4.4 Groundwater Sampling Techniques
Because most site investigations involve sampling groundwater from
monitoring wells, the following is an outline of suggested procedures to
be used for monitoring well sampling. Suggested procedures for other
types of wells follow this section.
For purposes of reference, the sampling of a monitoring well may be
divided into three parts: (1) measurement of well volume and water level,
(2) evacuation of static water, and (3) obtaining the sample.
Measurement of Well Volume and Water Level
(1) Measure or otherwise determine well-casing diameter.
(2) Determine static water level. (Express as feet below ground
surface or below casing elevation, depending on information
available.) The water level indicator must be cleaned before
use in the next well.
(3) Determine depth of the well.
2-12
-------
TABLE 2-3
SUGGESTED GROUNDWATER SAMPLING EQUIPMENT
EQUIPMENT
Sample Containers
Sample Preservatives
Field Blanks
Keys
Pipe wrenches
Propane torch
Hammer and cold chisel
Tape measure
Electronic water level indicator/
graduated depth sounder
Pocket calculator
Pump
Wei 1 bailer
USE
Appropriate to analyses desired (See
Table 2-1).
See Table 2-1.
See Table 2-2.
For locked monitoring wells.
May be necessary to remove steel security
caps on wells which have not been recently
opened and sampled.
Use to measure diameter of well casing
above ground level.
Used to determine static water level and
total depth of well.
Use for static water volume calculations.
Use to purge or evacuate well prior to
obtaining sample; it is not a recommended
means to obtain a sample. (Section 2.4.4
further qualifies the use of a pump in
groundwater sampling.)
A bailer is a device which is lowered into
a well to obtain water samples. Bailers
are typically 1 to 2 feet long and 0.75 to
2 inches in diameter. Several lengths and
diameters should be available to accommo-
date a variety of well diameters. Use to
obtain groundwater samples. Recommended
material for construction includes stain-
less steel with Teflon ball valve or all-
Teflon construction. Other materials such
as PVC or copper are not recommended be-
cause they may be difficult to decontamin-
ate thoroughly and can cause sample con-
tamination.
2-13
-------
TABLE 2-3 (cont'd)
EQUIPMENT
Monofilament line
Decontamination solutions/water
Plastic pails, graduated
Thermometer
Portable pH meter
Portable specific conductivity
meter
Field logbook
Camera/film
Sample tags
Chain-of-custody records
Receipt for sample forms
Waterproof ink pen
USE
Use for lowering bailer into well; should
be of sufficient strength to hold full
bailer and overcome any resistance between
well casing and bailer. The use of any
other type of line is not recommended.
Steel wire might be an appropriate substi-
tute but can cause handling problems for
personnel wearing gloves.
Use for decontaminating bailer and water
level indicator between wells.
Use for measuring volume of water taken
from well prior to sampling.
Use to measure temperature of groundwater.
Use to measure pH of groundwater.
Used to measure specific conductivity of
groundwater.
Used to record field observations.
Use to document sampling procedure.
2-14
-------
(4) Calculate the number of linear feet of static water (difference
between static water level and total depth of well).
(5) Calculate the static volume (or use a previously prepared table
or graph). An easily remembered formula for calculating the
static volume is:
V = Tr2(0.163)
Where: V = Static volume of well in gallons.
T = Thickness of water table in the well measured in
feet, i.e., linear feet of static water.
r = Inside radius of well casing in inches.
0.163 = A constant conversion factor which compensates for
the conversion of the casing radius from inches to
feet, the conversion of cubic feet to gallons, and
pi.
Evacuation of Static Water (Purging)
Before a groundwater sample is obtained, the static water must be
evacuated (purged). This process ensures that the sample subsequently
obtained is representative of the groundwater quality. There are several
schools of thought about the amount of water to be purged and how to
gauge this. An absolute minimum of five times the well's static volume
is recommended for legal cases (EPA, 1977). Another suggestion is to
measure the specific conductivity of the water as it is being purged and
to take the sample when two successive readings are the same.
The method used to purge the well is dependent upon the equipment
available and the accessibility of the well. A variety of pumps may be
used, including hand-operated or motor-driven suction pumps, peristaltic
pumps, or compressed-gas-driven pumps. If the pump being used does not
have a flow meter, a graduated plastic pail is a convenient way to mea-
sure the total volume discharged. Regardless of the type of pump used,
the sample should not be obtained from the pump used to purge the well,
and any hose coming in contact with the well water must be decontaminated
before use in the next well to avoid the possibility of sample contamina-
t ion.
2-15
-------
In many cases, the method used to purge the well is hand bailing.
This may be necessitated by accessibility, depth to water, well diameter,
etc. In addition, for wells which are slow to recharge, it may be neces-
sary to return several hours or even a day later to discharge a suf-
ficient volume and to obtain a sample.
The water removed from a hazardous substance site monitoring well
during the purging process could contain hazardous materials in relative-
ly high concentrations. As a result, the water should be containerized
and not discharged on the ground. Once a sample has been removed from
the well, the water can be carefully poured back into the well if it has
not been contaminated by purging.
Obtaining the Sample
(1) If a pump has been used to purge the well, the hose should be
removed and a bailer used to obtain the sample.
(2) If a bailer has been used to purge the well, it is recommended
that a previously cleaned second bailer be used to obtain the
sample.
(3) When transferring the water from the bailer to the sample con-
tainers, care should be used to avoid agitation, which promotes
the loss of volatile constituents.
(4) Bailers should be cleaned between wells by rinsing with a
water-miscible organic solvent, such as methanol or acetone,
followed by copious distilled water. Care must be taken to
remove all possible traces of the organic solvent to avoid con-
tamination and interference problems.
(5) The monofilament line or steel wire used to lower bailers into
the well should be discarded, and a new length used for each
well.
(6) If the water is being drawn for evidentiary purposes, the final
decontamination rinse water should be sampled and analyzed if
any chance of cross-contamination is suspected.
2-16
-------
2.4.5 Sampling Techniques for Other Wells
Where it becomes necessary to sample a well other than a typical
monitoring well, the following recommendations are made:
(1) For a domestic well, the cold water should be run for several
minutes prior to obtaining the sample. The use of any type of
water conditioning equipment should be noted. Such equipment
would necessitate sampling at a point before the well water has
passed through the conditioning equipment.
(2) For production wells, it should be established whether or not
the well has been in operation prior to the sampling time and
whether any filtration equipment is installed before the sam-
pling point.
(3) At some hazardous substance sites, special multi-level monitor-
ing wells have been installed which require the use of specific
kinds of equipment. In this instance, the firm which installed
the wells should be consulted prior to the sampling operation.
2-17
-------
REFERENCES - SECTION 2
Environmental Response Team, 1980. Field Monitoring and Analysis of
Hazardous Materials. EPA Training Manual, Course #165.4, Cincinnati,
Ohio.
Environmental Protection Agency, 1973. Handbook for Monitoring Indus-
trial Wastewater. U.S. EPA Technology Transfer.
Environmental Protection Agency, 1974. Methods for Chemical Analysis of
Water and Wastewater. U.S. EPA Technology Transfer.
Environmental Protection Agency. Handbook for Analytical Quality Con-
trol in Water and Wastewater Laboratories. U.S. EPA-600/4-79-019.
Environmental Protection Agency, 1977. Procedures Manual for Ground
Water Monitoring at Solid Waste Disposal Facilities. EPA/530/SW-611.
Huibregtse, K. R., and Moser, J. H. , 1976. Handbook for Sampling and
Sample Preservation of Water and Wastewater. U.S. EPA-600/4-76-049.
Municipal Environmental Research Laboratory, 1980. Samplers and Sam-
pling Procedures for Hazardous Waste Streams. Environmental Protection
Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio. EPA-600/280-018.
National Enforcement Investigations Center, 1980. Enforcement Consi-
derations for Evaluations of Uncontrolled Hazardous Waste Sites by
Contractors. EPA Office of Enforcement, Denver, Colorado.
Olson, D. M. , Berg, E. L. , Christensen, R. , Otto, H. , Ciancia, J.,
Bryant, G., Lair, M.D., Birch, M., Keffer, W., Dahl, T., and Wehner, T.,
1977. Compliance Sampling Manual. Enforcement Division, Office of Water
Enforcement, Compliance Branch.
Weber, C. I., 1973. Biological Field and Laboratory Methods for Measur-
ing the Quality of Surface Waters and Effluents. U.S. EPA-670/4-73-001.
2-18
-------
\A Halliburton Company
Superfund
Division
OPOUZXNQ
OTIDCLIKES
NMfDAL
GROOND-WATER WELL SAMPLING
4.7
5 of 15
Draft 2
All Division Activity
Ration II fit
Paul Goldstein
Zone Project Manager
1.0 OBJECTIVE
Ths objective of these guidelines La to provida ganaral reference information
on tha sampling of ground-watar vails.
This guideline ia primarily eoneamad with tha eollaetion of watar samplaa
fro* tha aaturatad zona of tha sub-aurfaca. Evary affort must be aada to
aaaura that tha aaapla la representative of tha particular zona of watar
bain? samplad.
2.0 LIMITATIONS "' - -••>-:
Thaaa guidalinaa ara for information only and ara not to tales precedence ovar
tha requirements of projact-apacifle plans for ground-water wall sampling.
Tha limitations of analyses of samples collected from walls include changes
to tha sample from the materials that tha water contacts, praasura changes, *'
and temperature changea. Tha sample will only ba representative of a small
volume of tha aquifer that is being sampled.
-i'
3.0 DEFINITIONS
None.
4.0 GUIDELINES
4.1 GENERAL
The primary consideration is to obtain a representative sample of the ground-
water body by guarding against mixing tha sample with stagnant (standing)
water in the well casing. In a nonpumping well, -thera will be little or no .
vertical mixing of tha water, and stratification will occur. Tha well water
in the screened section will mix with the ground water due to normal flow ;
pattame, but the well water above the screened section will remain isolated *
and become stagnant. Persona sampling should realize that stagnant water aay
contain foreign material inadvertently or deliberately Introduced from the
surface, resulting in unrepresentative data and misleading interpretation of
the same. "'"**• •>•";;,
'; '"'- r'1'--
To safeguard against collecting nonrepresentativ« stagnant water in a sample,
the following guidelines and techniques should be adhered to during sample •"'
withdrawal:
1 . Aa a general rule, all monitoring 'wells should be puap«d:' or^-ballad
prior to withdrawing a sample. Evacuation of a ainimun of one
-------
voluM of wa««r la thei wall caaing and preferably tore* to five
voluaea) la reeoaaended Cor a repraaentative saapla. In a high-
yielding ground-water formation and whara thara la no atagnant water
in the wall above tha aeraanad aaetlon, evacuation prior to sample
withdrawal la not aa critical. However, in all caaaa whara tha mon-
itoring data la to ba uaad Cor enforceaent aetiona, evacuation ia
recoaaanded.
2. For walla that can ba puapad or ballad to drynaaa with tha aaapling
equipment balng uaad, tha wall ahould ba •vacuatad and allowad to
racovar prior to aaapla withdrawal. It tha racovary cata ia fairly
rapid and tiaa allova, avaeuation of aore than ona voluaa of watar
ia prafarrad.
3. For hlgh-yialding aonitoring walla that cannot ba avacuatad to dry-
naaa, bailing without prapuaplng tha wall la not racoaaandad; thara
la no abaoluta aafaguard againat contaminating tha aaapla with stag-
nant watar. Tha following procaduraa ahould ba uaad:
a. Tha inlat Una of tha aaapling puap ahould ba placad juat balow
tha aurfaca of tha wall watar and thraa to fiva. voluaaa of watar
puapad at a rata equal to tha wall1a racovary rata. Thia pro-
vidaa raaaonabla aaauranca that all atagnant watar haa baan
avacuatad and that tha aaapla will ba rapraaantativa of tha
ground-watar body at that tiaa. Tha aaapla can than ba col-
lactad diractly froa tha puap dlacharga Una.
b. Tha inlat Una of tha saapling puap (or tha aubaarsibla puap
itaalf) ahould ba placad naar tha bottom of tha screen aaction,
approxiaataly ona wall voluaa of watar ahould ba puapad at tha
wall1a racovary rata and tha aaapla collactad diractly froa tha
dlacharga Una.
A nonrapraaantativa aaapla can alao raault froa axcaasiva pro-
pumping of tha aonitoring wall. Stratification of tha loach*t«
concantrationa in tha ground-watar formation nay occur or haaviar-
than-watar coapounda aay alnJc to tha lowar portions of tha aquifer.
Excaaaiva puaping can diluta or incraaaa tha contaminant concan-
trationa froa what ia rapraaantativa of tha aaapling point of
intaraat.
4.2 3A«PLlMGr MONITORING, AND EVACUATION EQUIPMENT
Saapla containers ahould conform to EPA regulationa for tha appropriate
contaainanta, with Boat containers being conatructed of polyethylene.
Tha following equipaant ahould ba on hand whan saapling ground-watar wells:
1. Coolers for saapla shipping and cooling, chemical preservatives, and
appropriate packing cartons and filler.
NUS44I* II
-------
GROoiro-wtfza WELL SAMPLING
4.7
nmtt*H
0
7 of 15
IffeMwOOT
Draft 2
2. Th«noMt«r; pS paper/meter; dissolved oxygea meter; earner* end,
film; tags; appropriate keys) (for locked wells); tap* *•«•<&»; pip*
wrenches, torch. hammer, and chiMl; wster-level Indicators; flow
meter; specific-conductivity meter; and depth sounder (only where
applicable).
3. Pumpe
a. Shallow-well pumps—Centrifugal, pitcher, •action, or peristal-
tic pumps with droplinee, air-lift apparatus (compressor and
tubing) where applicable.
b. Deep-well pumps—Submersible pump and electrical power generat-
ing unit on air-lift apparatus where applicable.
4. Bailers and monofilament line with tripod-pulley assembly (if neces-
sary) . Bailers shall be used to obtain samples from shallow and
deep ground-water wells.
S. Pails—Plastic, graduated.
6. Decontamination solutions—Distilled water, alconox, metHanoi.
Sample withdrawal methods require the use of pumps, compressed air, bailers,
and samplers. Ideally, sample withdrawal equipment should be completely
inert; economical to manufacture; easily cleaned, sterilized, and reused;
able to operate at remote sites in the absence of power-resources; and capa-
ble of delivering variable rates for well flushing and sample collection.
The sample withdrawal equipment (evacuation devices) aost commonly used is
discussed in Section 4.4.1 below.
4.3 CALCULATIONS OF WELL VOLUME
Calculations are to be done according to the following steps:
1. Obtain all available information on well construction (casing,
screens, etc.).
2. Determine well or casing diameter.
3. Determine static water level (feet below ground level).
4. Determine depth of well.
5. Calculate number of linear feet of static water (total depth minus
the static water level).
6. Calculate static volume In gallons (V • Tr2 (0.163)), where T is
the linear feet of static water and r is the inside radius of tha
well of casing in inches.
7. Determine the minimum amount to be evacuated before sampling.
nus tttm is aiti
-------
GROOHO-MATSR WELL SAMPLING
4.7
8 of 15
Draft 2
4.4 EVACDASZOH OF STATIC WAIER (Purging)
The amount of flushing a well receives prior to sample collection depends on
tlM intent of the Monitoring program a« well as the hydrogeologic condl-
tione. Prograaie where overall quality determinations of water reaervee are
involved may require long pumping periods to obtain a sample that la repre-
sentative of a large volume of that aquifer. The pumped volume can be
determined prior to sampling so that the sample la a composite of a known
volume of the aquifer, or the well can be pumped until the stabilization of
parameters such as temperature, electrical conductance, and pH has occurred.
However, monitoring for defining a contaminant plume requires a representa-
tive sample of a small volume of the aquifer. These circumstances require
that the well be pumped enough to remove the stagnant water but not enough to
induce flow from other areas. Generally four to six well volumes are con-
sidered effective, or calculations can be made to determine, on the basis of
the aquifer parameters and well dimensions, the appropriate volume to remove
prior to sampling.
4.4.1 Evacuation Devteee
The devices described In this section are the onee commonly used.
that have been aide on a limited scale have been omitted.
Others
Table 4.7-1 provides guidance on the proper evacuation device to use for
given sampling situations.
Bailers
Bailers are the simplest evacuation devices used and have many advantages.
They generally consist of a length of pipe, usually with a ball check-valve
at the bottom. A line is. used to lower the bailer and retrieve the sample.
Advantagee
e only practical limitations on size and materials
e no power source needed
e portable
e Inexpensive, eo It can be dedicated and hung In a well reducing the
chancee of cross contamination
e minimal outgasslng of volatile organics while sample Is in bailor
e readily available
Limitations
e time consuming to flush well of stagnant water
e transfer of sample nay cause aeration
.Suction Pumps
There are many different types of suction pumps such as centrifugal, peri-
staltic, diaphragm, and pitcher pumps. Diaphragm pumps can be used for well
evacuation at a fast pumping rate and sampling at a low pumping rate. The
peristaltic pump is a low volume pump that uses rollers to squeeze flexible
NUS ««*• aa am
-------
GROUND-HATER MELZ. SAMPLING
4.7
9 o* 15
tubin? craatino; •nation. TM« tubing can ba dedicated to a wall to prevant
croaa contamination. Periataltic puapa, however, requira a power source.
Th« pitchar pu»p la a coaaon far* hand-puap.
Advantage•
• portable, inexpenaiva, readily availabla
Liaitationa
• reatrictad to areaa with watar lavela within 20 to 25 ft of tha
ground surface
• vacuua can cauaa loaa ot diaaolvad gaaaaa and volatila organica
Gaa-Litt Saaplara
Thia group of saaplara Includaa thoaa that uaa a gaa praaaur* In tha annulua
of tha wall to Corca tha watar out a sampling tuba and othars which uaa tha
gaa In a vanturi to forca tha aaapla up a tuba.
Advantagaa
a portabla, inaxpanaiva, raadily availabla
a good for w«ll davalopmant
Olaadvantagaa
a if air la uaad, oxidation of tha aaapla may occur
a loaa of COj changes tha pH and oatala concantratlona will ba
lowarad
a loaa of volatila compounda aay occur
Subaaraibla Pumpa
Thara «ra now many typaa of pumpa which can ba conaidarad aubmaraibla; that
is, thay talca in watar and puah tha aaapla to tha aurfaca. Tha powar sourcaa
for thaaa aaaplara may ba coapraaaad gaa or alactricity. tha oparation prin-
ciplaa vary. Tha dlaplacamant of tha aaapla can ba by an inflatabla bladdar,
sliding piston, gaa bubbla, or tapallar. Induatry ia now concentrating on
tha manufacture of davlcaa to obtain aaaplaa in 2-In. diameter walla with
water lavala balow 20 to 23 ft.
Advantagea
a portabla and raadily availabla
a construction oatariala to natch parameters of Interest
a availabla for 2-in. diaaater wells
Limitations
a may have low delivery rataa
a expanaiva
a coapreaaad gaa or electric powar naadad
a sediment in water may cauaa problaaa with some of thaaa sampler types
NUS <«•• II •<«>
-------
<3«OCHD-WATM TOLL SAMPLING
4.7
10
Draft 2
4.5 SAMPLING
4.5.1 Stapling Plan
Prior to sampling, a sampling plan and a safety plan should ba developed In
consultation with tha intereatad parties and submitted for approval. Tha
contents of a sampling plan conaiat of tha following:
1 . Background and objectiva of sampling
2. Briaf araa and waata characterization
3. Salection of sampling location, with nap or sketch
4. Sampling equipment to ba uaad
5. Intandad numbar, volumaa, and typaa of samples
S. Working achadula
7. Liat of taaa aembers
3. Liat of observers
9. List of contacts
10. Othar Information, such aa tha nacaaaity for a warrant, or permis-
sion of antry and for split aamplaa
4.5.2 Ganaral Sampling Rulaa
If tha aamplaa nuat ba filtarad, tha appropriata ehamical preaervatives ara
to ba addad aa soon aa poaaibla.
Racommandad aampla containera should ba uaad.
Samplaa of organic analysis should ba leapt rafrigaratad or on ica during
transport to tha laboratory.
Racomnandad holding times should ba adharad to in order to ensure Chat con-
stituent alteration Is olninizad.
All samplea will require tha usa of a bailar to maintain tha Integrity of the
aampla. Sample handling, labeling, and shipping methods are described In
other guidelines of this manual.
4.5.3 Sampling Procedure
tha procedure for sampling la made up of tha following steps:
1 . Opan wall cap and usa dataction equipment on tha escaping gases at
tha wall head to determine tha need for respiratory protection.
NUS ««•• it «i*a
-------
Oalao; cleaa equipment, monad well far total depth and water level;
then calculate tha fluid volume- In thai casing.
2. Determine depth to midpoint of screen or well ••etion open to
aquifer tram casing top. Any dry walla encountered mat be noted
during tha field investigation.
3. Select appropriate purging equipment (aaa Tabla 4.7-1). if an
electric submersible pump with packer ia chosen, go to step 10.
4. Lower purging equipment or intake into tha wall to a short distance
below tha water level and begin water removal. Collect or dispose
of purged water in an acceptable manner. Lower purging device, aa
required, to maintain submergence.
5. If pumping, measure water level with an electric sounder in uniform
drawdown increments of 19- to 30-second intervals. If balling,
measure water levels aa needed for a good record.*
6. Measure rate of discharge frequently. A bucket and stopwatch are
aoat commonly used; other techniques include uaing pipe trajectory
methods or constructing weir boxes.
7. Observe peristaltic or vacuum pump intake Cor degaaaing "bubblaa."
If bubblee are abundant and the intake ia fully submerged, these
devlcea may not be suitable for collecting samplea for volatile
organica.
3. Purge a minimum of three to five casing volumaa before sampling.
In low permeability strata, one volume will suffice.
9. While pumping, lower intake to midacrean or mldopen section depth
and collect sample. If bailing, lower device to sampling level
before filling (thia requires other than a "bucket-type" bailer).
Purged water should be collected in a designated container or dis-
posed in an acceptable manner.
10. (For pump and packer assembly only.) Lower assembly into well ao
that packer ia positioned Just above the screen or open section and
inflate. Purge a volume equal to at leaat twice the screen or open
section volume below the packer (whichever ia greater) before sam-
pling. Packers should alweya be tested in a casing section above
ground to determine proper Inflation pressures for good sealing.
11. Allow the well recharge to tha static water level and then sample.
•These data may be used to compute aquifer transmissivity and other
hydraulic characteristics.
NU> <«•• 11 (Id
-------
GROUND-MAXKR WELL SAMPLING
4.7
12 of 15
Draft 2
12. After sampling, monitor water level recovery (may not be appro-
priate with a packer/pump assembly) and decontaminate all equip-
ment. Make aura well is securely capped.
The data required from the sampling program will determine the quantity and
preservation needed for each group of constituents. Sample preservation is
not completed and aay not be possible for some parameters. This may require
field analysis for pH, Eh, electrical addition, refrigeration, and freezing.
The use of preservatives retards both biological activity and the hydrolysis
of some constituents and also reduces volatility. A list of preservatives
and their effects is presented in Table 4.7-2.
Some parameters require special preservation, such as eyanidee and phenols.
Table 4.7-3 illustrates the quantities and preservation methods for the 129
priority pollutants Identified by the EPA.
The EPA has recommended volumes of samples to be collected, container type,
preservation methods, and holding times for specific parameters. Generally,
however, the volumea for individual constituents can be grouped and collectad
together where the handling is the same. These groups include the volatile
organics (purgable organics), metals, extractabla organics, and some general
chemistry constituents.
4.6 DECONTAMINATION
Decontamination solutions may vary according to type of contamination. To
decontaminate pumps used in sampling or evacuation, two' separate solutions
should be prepared: one containing alconox and water and the other containing
water and oethanol. The alconox solution should be run through the pump and
tubing first, and the methanol solution should be used as a rinse. Then the
pump should be rinsed with distilled water.
-------
CMlng
«JS It
W*l«r l«
>2i (t
2-lnch
<2i It
y«t«r l
>Ji It
4-lnch
Water level
«2b It
Hater level
>2S It
6-Inch
Hater level
<2S It
Hater level
>2S It
0-lnch
Hater
<2S It
Hater level
>2S It
T«bl« 4.7-1 . Purging
S«l«ctloa
B«ll«r
F«rl«taltlc
tump
V«cuua
tump
Airlift
Ol«pbr«ga Suta«r«lt>l*
•Ir*»h' 01«pki«g>
tump tump
(l«ctrlc
tump
-------
GROUND-WATER KKLZ. 3AMPL1WJ
4.7
of 15
Draft 2
Preservative
Acid (HNO3)
Acid (H2SO4)
Alkali (NaOH)
Refrigeration
Table 4.7-2. Sample Preservation Method*
Action
AppUcablility
3«ct«rial inhibitor
Metal* solvent,
prevent* precipitation
Bacterial inhibitor
Salt formation with
organic base*
Salt formation with
volatile compounds
Bacterial inhibitor
Nitrogen fora*, phosphorous
form*
Metal*
Organic sample* (COO, oil
and grease, organic
carbon)
Aaaonla, aaine*
Cyanide*, organic acids
Acidity-alkalinity, organic
materials, 300, color,
odor, organic P. organic
N, carbon, etc.;
biological organisms
(coliform, etc.)
NUI««1> IS «!•»
-------
aaOOMD-HAXEX WLL 3AHPLUW
4.7
n^WIBA Q
'*** 15 o« 15
IftaMMl
>•» Draft 2
Tabl* 4.7-3. Sample Itoqalrementa for the 129 Priority Pollutant*
A. Extractabl* Organic*
1. Fill 1-9*1 bottl*.
2. Cool and aalntaln sample at 4°C.
B. Metal*
1. Pill 1-qt bottla.
2. Adju*t to pH of 2 with 10103.
3. Cool and aalntaln sample at 4°C.
C. Volatile Organic Analyst* (VOA or purgabl* organic*)
1. Pill tvo new and cleaned 40-«1 vial*.
2. S«al with cleaned septum and cap; invert; tap; if air bubble* app«ar,
refill.
3. If wa*t* stream contain* residual chlorin*, collact Civ* vial*.
Pr«**rv« two with either sodium biaulfata or sodium thioculfat*.
Th*** vial* will b* specially narked, and the preservative will then
have been added in the lab.
4. Wrap in waterproof packing; cool and maintain at 4°C.
0. All Cyanide*
1. Fill a 1-qt cubitainer (polyethylene bottle).
2. teat for chlorin* with potassium Iodide (KI) starch paper.
3. If paper color la unchanged, go to step 5.
4. If paper turn* blue, add ascorbic acid until paper no longer turns
blue.
5. Add an additional 0.6 g ascorbic acid (preaeaaured In a vial).
MUC44IB It •!•»
-------
SECTION 3
SOIL AND SEDIMENT SAMPLING METHODS
3.1 GENERAL
The analysis of soils and sediments for the contaminants present at
a hazardous substance site can provide valuable information about the
existence and extent of contaminant migration. Vertical contaminant
movement may occur through soil strata into the groundwater resulting in
the lateral transport of pollutants. Surface water can transport con-
taminants directly or as bound complexes with soil or other solids.
It is important that field personnel determine whether soil or sedi-
ment samples require handling as hazardous (concentrated) or environmen-
tal samples. Factors such as weathering and dilution of soil by sun and
rain, turbulence of surface water, and permeability of soil will affect
the concentration of contaminants in a given sample. This section
focuses on those samples which would be considered environmental samples.
(See Section 5 for guidance on obtaining and handling concentrated
[hazardous] soil and sediment samples.)
Many of the soil and sediment samples taken during the field inves-
tigation of a hazardous substance site are grab samples. (See Section 1
for a definition of types of samples.) However, it is possible to use a
modification of composite sampling to obtain useful data about contamina-
tion over a wide area and still control analytical costs.
3.2 SOIL SAMPLING
Soil and subsurface samples may be used not only to identify conta-
minants, but also to evaluate the role of soil types in influencing the
migration of contaminants.
3.2.1 Sample Containers
An appropriate soil sample container is an 8- to 10-ounce wide-
mouth jar with a Teflon-lined screw cap. For samples for organic analy-
sis, the containers are cleaned by washing in detergent and rinsing with
3-1
-------
organic-free water. De-ionized or distilled water rinses should be used
for containers to hold samples for inorganic analyses. Typically, a full
8-ounce wide-mouth jar of soil which has been sieved during the sampling
process will provide a sufficient quantity for priority pollutant analy-
sis (Federal Register, Vol. 44, No. 233, Dec. 3, 1979).
3.2.2 Surface Soil Samples
Surface soil samples may be obtained from areas where spills and/or
leaks of contaminants may have occurred. Investigators can determine
these areas from site records or photographs or on direct observation of
stained soils or areas lacking vegetation. (If soil is receiving a con-
stant discharge of material, samples taken should be treated as hazar-
dous/concentrated samples.)
Approach For Surface Samples
Depending on the area to be sampled, the information desired and the
analytical support available, investigators may take several approaches.
(1) The total area of study may be divided into a grid pattern to
identify samples with a specific location.
(2) If the area of study is large, and if complete characterization
is required, a random sampling approach may be used to reduce
sample numbers. In this instance, the area is gridded and sam-
ple locations determined randomly.
(3) A large study area can also be divided into grids and soil com-
bined from several randomly chosen locations within that grid.
This soil then constitutes one sample.
Any combination of the above approaches may by employed to charac-
terize contamination over a large area. The number of samples required
to produce statistically valid data is impossible to determine beforehand
since it depends on the variability in the analytical results. In cer-
tain instances a small-scale sampling program may be required to estimate
data variability.
3-2
-------
As in any sampling program, it is advisable to obtain an off-site,
theoretically uncontaminated surface soil sample to establish background
levels of analyzed chemicals.
Sampling Techniques and Equipment for Surface Samples
(1) All pertinent weather factors such as temperature, wind velo-
city and precipitation should be noted and recorded in the
field logbook.
(2) A sketch of the area of study should be made in the logbook,
indicating the sampling approach, sample locations and depths,
and site conditions.
(3) A stainless steel scoop or hand trowel is recommended for ob-
taining surface samples.
(4) Shallow, high-density polyethylene pans lined with aluminum
foil may be used for mixing soil for compositing.
(5) A stainless steel sieve may be used for screening rocky soil
before placing it in the sample container. Sieving may be re-
quired by the analytical laboratory.
(6) Equipment such as stainless steel scoops must be decontaminated
between sampling locations to avoid contamination of the next
sample. The equipment should be detergent-washed and rinsed
with distilled water. If organic contaminants are involved, a
methanol or acetone wash followed by an organic-free water
rinse is suggested.
3.2.3 Subsurface Soil Samples
Subsurface soil samples indicate the extent of contaminant penetra-
tion into the soil and also provide a means to evaluate the effect of
soil type distribution on contaminant migration. Either hand-operated or
power equipment can be used, depending on the extent of the investiga-
tions .
3-3
-------
The most important safety factor involved is the avoidance of buried
containers or pockets of highly concentrated material. A thorough back-
ground information search should be completed before obtaining subsurface
samples, especially on or near the site. At a minimum, a metal detector
survey should be performed before obtaining subsurface samples by hand.
If funds are available, a survey using ground-penetrating radar is sug-
gested before boring with power equipment.
Sampling Approach for Subsurface Soil Samples
Locations for subsurface soil samples can be chosen on the basis of
such background information as areas of past waste storage, the waste
handling practices which gave rise to contaminated soil, and geological
survey information. Visual inspection of the study area may also help.
If a large study area is involved, a random sampling approach similar to
the types outlined earlier (Section 3.2.2) may be employed. Any avail-
able hydrological data on seasonal water table levels and regional
groundwater flow patterns should also be obtained.
Subsurface Sampling Techniques and Equipment
The selection and use of various types of hand-operated subsurface
sampling equipment will be determined by the type of soil and subsurface
material encountered. The following is a list of useful equipment and
techniques:
(1) A shovel may be used to dig down several inches or several
feet, depending on soil types. A stainless steel scoop can
then be used to take soil from the depth reached by digging.
(2) A slotted sampling trier allows for core sampling but is limi-
ted to a depth of about 2.5 to 3 feet and may be of no use at
all in soils difficult to penetrate due to compaction or stone
and gravel content. The use of the trier allows a visual ob-
servation of a soil core before the soil is placed in the sam-
ple jar.
3-4
-------
(3) A hand auger may be used to collect subsurface samples at
depths up to 4 or 5 feet; however, it mixes soils and thus
destroys the cohesive structure and stratigraphic character.
(4) A hollow-stem hand auger provides the opportunity to collect a
small core sample at depths up to 3 or 4 feet, although the
success of this is greatly dependent upon soil type.
(5) A hand-driven split-spoon sampler provides a means to obtain
somewhat undisturbed core samples. The depth will again be
limited by the soil type and also the number of sampling rod
sections available for the split spoon. When the split spoon
is opened, the core should be visually inspected for strata
changes. When different strata are present, samples should be
obtained from each, using a stainless-steel scoop.
(6) A hand-driven hollow-stem sampler of the type used in agricul-
ture may be used to retrieve core samples from depths of 16
feet or so. Again, this method is limited by soil type. As
with the split-spoon sampler, the core should be visually in-
spected and samples taken accordingly.
It is important that all equipment coming in contact with the soil
be decontaminated between sampling locations. The equipment should be
detergent-washed and rinsed with distilled water. If the presence of
organic compounds is suspected, a solvent such as methanol or acetone
should be used followed by rinsing with organic-free water.
3.3 SEDIMENT SAMPLES
Sediment samples are valuable for locating pollutants of low water
solubility and high soil binding affinity. Where surface waters might
show trace quantities of contaminants, thus leading investigators to
believe that an off-site contaminant migration problem is minor, the
analysis of sediments might show otherwise. Heavy metals and high mole-
cular weight halogenated hydrocarbons are examples of contaminant groups
which might be found in greater concentrations in sediments.
3-5
-------
It is important to note that the sediments obtained from surface
impoundments, such as lagoons, which are suspected to be highly concen-
trated are to be handled and treated as hazardous (concentrated) samples.
This section addresses sampling those locations which will produce sam-
ples which can be treated and handled as environmental samples.
3.3.1 Approach for Sediment Sampling
The review of background information gives an indication of the
types of substances which may be present in sediments.
(1) One would look for chemicals known to bind with the soil.
(2) Of additional importance is any hydrogeological information
which can help establish a relationship between the contaminant
source and the contaminants in sediments. (For example, are
contaminants entering the sediments via surface water or
groundwater?)
(3) The pH of the surface water over the sediments should be deter-
mined to identify any unusual pH conditions which would influ-
ence contaminant precipitation into the sediments.
(4) Several sediment samples should be obtained from the area near-
est the suspected contaminant point source.
(5) A background sediment sample should be obtained from sediments
upstream from the suspected point source for running water and
from sediments away from the suspected point source for stand-
ing surface water. In cases of high contamination of small
bodies of standing water, it may be impossible to find a back-
ground sample. The analysis of background sediments attempts
to establish the contribution of the source to pollution levels
in the area. This is especially important if contamination with
heavy metals is suspected because they occur naturally.
(6) Field instruments can be used to screen the samples as they are
taken.
3-6
-------
3.3.2 Sediment Sampling Techniques
Very simple techniques can usually be employed for sediment sam-
pling. Most samples will be grab samples, although sometimes sediment
taken from various locations may be combined into one sample to reduce
the amount of analytical support required. Suggested techniques include
the following:
(1) In small, low-flowing streams or near the shore of a pond or
lake, the sample container (typically an 8-ounce wide-mouth
glass jar) may be used to scrape up the sediments.
(2) To obtain sediments from larger streams or farther from the
shore of a pond or lake, a Teflon beaker attached to a tele-
scoping aluminum pole by means of a clamp may be used to dredge
sediments.
(3) To obtain sediments from rivers or in deeper lakes and ponds, a
spring-loaded sediment dredge or benthic core sampler may be
used by lowering the sampler to the appropriate depth with a
rope. The sediments thus obtained are then placed into the
sample container.
(4) In each of the last two above cases, the sampling device should
be decontaminated between locations.
Below is a list of suggested equipment to be used for sampling soils
and sediments.
(1) Sample containers (8-oz. wide-mouth glass jar with Teflon-lined
screw cap)
(2) Stainless steel scoops
(3) Stainless steel sieves (assorted mesh sizes)
(4) Field logbook
3-7
-------
(5) High-density polyethylene pans
(6) Shovel
(7) Slotted sampling trier
(8) Hand auger, hollow stem
(9) Hand-driven split-spoon sampler
(10) Hand-driven agricultural sampler (hollow tube)
(11) Teflon beaker, attached to telescoping aluminum pole with
clamp.
(12) Sediment dredge/benthic core sampler
3-8
-------
SAMPLING PRIORITIES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTANTS
PAGE FOUR
Environmental Compartment
Compound Water
PHTHALATE ESTERS
Dimethyl phthalate
Diethyl phthalate
Di-n-butyl phthalate
Di-n-octyl phthalate
Bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate
Butyl benzyl phthalate
POLYCYCLJC AROMATICS
Acenaphthene
Acenaphthylene
Anthracene
Benzo (a) anthracene
Benzo (b) fluoranthene
Benzo (k) fluoranthene
Benzo (ghi) perylene
Benzo (a) pyrene
Chrysene
Oibenzo (a,h) anthracene
Fluoranthene
Fluorene
Indeno (1,2,3-cd) pyrene
Naphthalene
Phenanthrene
Pyrene
NITROSAMINES AND MISCELLANEOUS COMPOUNDS
Dimethyl nitrosamine X
Diphenyl nitrosamine
Di-n-propyl nitrosamine X
Benzidine
3,3'-Dichlorobenzidine
1,2-Diphenylhydrazine (hydrazobenzene)
Acrylonitrile X
Adapted from Chapman, P.. G. P. Romberg and G Vigors 1982
Sediment
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
"Design of Mo
Studies for Priority Pollutants." Journal Water Pollution Control Federation
Biota
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
nitorin
Vol. 5
Number 3.
-------
SAMPLING PRIORITIES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTANTS
PAGE THREE
Compound
Environmental Compartment
Water Sediment Biota
ETHERS (Continued)
Bis(2-chloroisopropvOether
2-Chloroethyl vinyl ether
4-Chlorophenvl phenyl ether
4-Bromophenyl phenyl ether
Bis(2-chloroethoxy) methane
MONOCYCLIC AROMATICS
Benzene
Chlorobenzene
1,2-Dichlorobenzene (o-dichlorobenzene)
1,3-Dichlorobenzene (m-dichlorobenzene)
1,4-Dichlorobenzene (p-dichlorobenzene)
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene
Hexachlorobenzene
Ethylbenzene
Nitrobenzene
Toluene
2,4-Dinitrotoluene
2,6-Dinitrotoluene
PHENOLS AND CRESOLS
Phenol
2-Chlorophenol
2.4-Dichlorophenol
2,4,6-Trichlorophenol
Pentachlorophenol
2-Nitrophenol
4-Nitrophenol
2,4-Dinitrophenol
2,4-Dimethylphenol
p-Chloro-m-cresol
4,6-Dinitro-p-cresol
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
These compounds have been removed from the EPA priority pollutant list.
-------
SAMPLING PRIORITIES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTANTS
PAGE TWO
Environmental Compartment
Compound Water Sediment Biota
PCBs AND RELATED COMPOUNDS
Polychlorinated biphenyls (6 PCB arochlors) X X
2-Chloronaphthalene X X
HALOGENATED ALIPHATICS
Chloromethane (methyl chloride) X
Dichioromethane (methylene chloride) X
Trichloromethane (chloroform) X
Tetrachloromethane (carbon tetrachloride) X
Chloroethane (ethyl chloride) X
1,1-Dichloroethane (ethylidine chloride) X
1,2-Dichloroethane (ethylene dichloride) X
1,1,1-Trichloroethane (methyl chloroform) X
1,1,2-Trichloroethane X
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane X
Hexachloroethane X
Chloroethene (vinyl chloride) X
1,1-Dichloroethene (vinylidine chloride) X
1,2-Trans-dichloroethene X
Trichloroethene X
Tetrachloroethene (perchloroethylene) X
1,2-Dichloropropane X
1,3-Dichloropropene X
Hexachlorobutadiene X X
Hexachlorocyclopentadiene X X
Bromomethane (methyl bromide) X
Bromodichloromethane X X
Dibromochloromethane X X
Tribromomethane (bromoform) X X
Dichlorodifluoromethane* X X
Trichlorofluoromethane* X X
ETHERS
Bis(chloromethyl) ether* X
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether X
These compounds have been removed from the EPA priority pollutant list.
-------
EXHIBIT 1
SAMPLING PRIORITIES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTANTS
Compounds are characterized on the basis of persistence, accumulative capacity and
volatility. "X" indicates the appropriate environmental compartment(s) for initial
sampling.
Environmental Compartment
Compound
Water
Sediment
Biota
METALS AND INORGANICS
Antimony
Arsenic
Asbestos
Beryllium
Cadmium
Chromium
Copper
Cyanides
Lead
Mercury
Nickel
Selenium
Silver
Thallium
Zinc
PESTICIDES
Acrolein
Aldrin
Chlordane
ODD
DDE
DDT
Dieldrin
Endosulfan and endosulfan sulfate
Endrin and endrin aldehyde
Heptachlor
Heptachlor epoxide
Hexachlorocyclohexane (a,B,5 isomers)
y-Hexachlorocyclohexane (lindane)
Isophorone
TCDD
Toxaphene
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-------
CONSTITUENTS IN INDUSTRIAL
SIGNIFICANT POTENTIAL
MUNICIPAL WAS1EWATER HAVING
SOUNOWATER CONTAMINATION
MINING (SIC 10. 11. and 12)
Metal and Coal Mining Industry (SIC 10, 11. and 12)
pH Zinc
Sulfate Tin
Nitrate Vanadium
Chloride Radium
Total Dissolved Solids Phenol
Phosphate Selenium
Copper Iron
Nickel Chromium
Lead Cadmium
Uranium
PAPER AND ALLIED PRODUCTS (SIC 26)
Pulp and Paper Industry (SIC 261 and 262)
COD/BOO
TOC
PH
Heavy metals
Phenols
Sulfite
Color
Biocides
CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS (SIC 26)
Organic Chemicals Industry (SIC 286)
COO/BOO
pH
Total Dissolved Solids
Heavy metals
Alkalinity
TOC
Total phosphorus
Magnesium
Silver
Manganese
Calcium
Potassium
Sodium
Aluminum
Gold
Fluoride
Cyanide
Nitrogen
Phosphorus
Total Oiss.
Solids
Phenols
Cyanide
Total nitrogen
Inorganic Chemicals. Alkalies, and Chlorine Industry (SIC 281)
Acidity/alkalinity
Total dissolved solids
Chloride
Sulfate
COO/BOD
TOC
Mercury
Chlorinated benzenoids Chromium
and polynuclear aromatic* Lead
Phenols Titanium
Fluoride Iron
Total phosphorus Aluminum
Cyanide Boron
Arsenic
CHEMICALS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS
Plastic Materials and Synthetics Industry (SIC 282)
COD/BOD
prt
Phenols
Total dissolved solids
Sulfate
Phosphorus
Nitrate
Organic nitrogen
Chlorinated benzenoids and
polynuclear aromatics
nitrogen Fertilizer Industry (SIC 2873)
Ammonia Sulfate
Chloride Organic nitrogen
compounds
Ammonia
Cyanide
Zinc
Mercaptans
COO
Iron, total
Nitrogen Fertilizer Industry (SIC 2873) (Conl.)
Chromium Zinc
Total dissolved solids Calcium
Nitrate Sodium
pH
Phosphate
Phosphate Fertilizer Industry (SIC 2874)
Calcium
Dissolved solids
Fluoride
pH
Phosphorus
Ac i d i ty
A1umi num
Arsenic
Iron
Cadmium
PETROLEUM AND COAL PRODUCTS (SIC 29)
Petroleum Refining Industry (SIC 291)
Ammonia Chloride
Chromium Color
COD/BOD Copper
pH Cyanide
Phenols Iron
Sulfide Lead
Total dissolved solids Mercaptans
PRIMARY METALS (SIC 33)
Steel Industry (SIC 331)
Cyanide
Phenols
Iron
Nickel
PH
Chloride
Sulfate
Ammonia
Mercury
Nitrogen
Sulfate
Uranium
Vanadium
Radium
Nitrogen
Odor
Total phosphc
Sulfate
TOC
Turbidity
Zinc
Tin
Chromium
Zinc
ELECTRIC. CAS. AND SANITARY SERVICES (SIC 49)
Power Generation Industry (SIC 491)
COO/BOO
Polychlorinated
biphenyls
Total dissolved solids
Oil and grease
Copper
Zinc
Chromium
Other corrosion
inhibitors
Municipal Sewage Treatment QIC 49S)
pH Nitrate
COO/BOO Ammonia
Alkalinity Chloride
Detergents Sodium
Total dissolved solids Potassium
Phosphorus
Organic bioci
Sulfur dioiid
Heat
Sulfate
Copper
Tin
Zinc
Various Organ
-------
ORGANIC SAMPLE COLLECTION REQUIREMENTS
MATER SAMPLES
EXTRACTABLE ANALYSIS
(LOW LEVEL)
EXTRACTABLE ANALYSIS
(MEDIUM LEVEL*)
REQUIRED
VOLUME
1 GALLON
fb
fl
fh
r i
1 GALLON
CONTAINER TYPE
2 X 1/2-GAL. AMBER
GLASS BOTTLES
OR
4 X 1-LITER AMBER
GLASS BOTTLES
4 X 32-OZ. WIDE-MOUTH
GLASS JARS
VOLATILE ANALYSIS
(LOW OR MEDIUM LEVEL*)
80 ML
fl 0
2 X40-ML GLASS VIALS
•ALL MEDIUM LEVEL SAMPLES TO BE SEALED IN METAL PAINT CAN FOR SHIPMENT
-------
ORGANIC SAMPLE COLLECTION REQUIREMENTS
SOIL/SEDIMENT SAMPLES
EXTRACTABLE ANALYSIS
(LOW OR MEDIUM LEVEL*)
REQUIRED
VOLUME
6 OZ.
on
CONTAINER TYPE
I X 8-OZ. WIDE-MOUTH
GLASS JAR
OR
2 X 4-OZ. WIDE-MOUTH
GLASS JARS
VOLATILE ANALYSIS
(LOW OR MEDIUM LEVEL*)
210 ML
oo
2 X12D-ML WIDE-MOUTH
GLASS VIALS
•ALL MEDIUM LEVEL SAMPLES TO BE SEALED
IN METAL PAINT CAN FOR SHIPMENT
-------
INORGANIC SAMPLE COLLECTION REQUIREMENTS
HATER SAMPLES
METALS ANALYSIS
(LOW LEVEL)
METALS ANALYSIS
(MEDIUM LEVEL*)
CYANIDE (CN~) ANALYSIS
(LOW LEVEL)
CYANIDE (CN~) ANALYSIS
(MEDIUM LEVEL*)
REQUIRED
VOLUME
1 LITER
16 OZ.
1 LITER
16 OZ.
•ALL MEDIUM LEVEL SAMPLES TO BE SEALED
IN METAL PAINT CAN FOR SHIPMENT
9
x
CONTAINER TYPE
1 X 1-LITER POLYETHYLENE
BOTTLE
1 X 16-OZ. HIDE-MOUTH
GLASS JAR
1 X 1-LITER POLYETHYLENE
BOTTLE
1 X 16-OZ. WIDE-MOUTH
GLASS JAR
-------
INORGANIC SAMPLE COLLECTION REQUIREMENTS
SOIL/SEDIMENT SAMPLES
REQUIRED
VOLUME
CONTAINER TYPE
METALS AND CYANIDE (CN~)
ANALYSIS
(LOW OR MEDIUM LEVEL*)
6 OZ.
1 X 8-OZ. HIDE-MOUTH
aASS JAR
OR
'ALL MEDIUM LEVEL SAMPLES TO BE SEALED
IN METAL PAINT CAN FOR SHIPMENT
X
2 X 4-OZ. WIDE-MOUTH
GLASS JARS
-------
DIOXIN SAMPLE COLLECTION REQUIREMENTS
SOIL/SEDIMENT
SAMPLES
REQUIRED
VOLUME
CONTAINER TYPE
2,3,7,8-TCDD
(DIOXIN) ANALYSIS
4 OZ.
1 X 4-OZ. HIDE-MOUTH
GLASS JAR
OR
1 X 8-OZ, WIDE-MOUTH
GLASS JAR
•ALL MEDIUM LEVEL SAMPLES TO BE SEALED
IN METAL PAINT CAN FOR SHIPMENT
X
-------
HIGH HAZARD SAMPLE COLLECTION REQUIREMENTS
LIQUID SAMPLES
ORGANIC AND INORGANIC
ANALYSIS
SOLID SAMPLES
ORGANIC AND INORGANIC
ANALYSIS
REQUIRED
VOLUME
6 OZ.
6 OZ.
CONTAINER TYPE
1 X 8-OZ. HIDE-MOUTH
GLASS JAR
1 X 8-OZ. WIDE-MOUTH
GLASS JAR
•ALL MEDIUM LEVEL SAMPLES TO BE SEALED
IN METAL PAINT CAN FOR SHIPMENT
X
-------
RECOMMENDED SAMPLING AND PRESERVATION PROCEDURES FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER
Parameter
Acidity
Alkalinity
Asbestos
Bacteria
Bicarbonate
BOD
Bromide
Carbonate
Chloride
Chlorine Demand
Chromium VI
COD
Color
Conductance
Cyanide
Fluoride
Hardness
Hydrazine
Collection
technique
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab only
Grab only
Grab only
Grab or composite
Grab only
Grab or composite
Grab only
Crab or composite
Grab only
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Container9
P.G
P.C
F
Pro, G
P.G
P,G
P.G
P.G
P,G
P,G
P,G
P.G
P.G
P.G
P.G
P
P.G
P.G
Preservation
Cool, 4°C
Cool, 4°C
Cool, 4°CC
Cool, 4°C, 10*
Na2S203. EDTA
Determine onsite
Cool, 4°C
None required
Determine onsite
None required
Determine onsite
Cool, 4°C
H2S04 to pH <2; Cool, 4°C
Cool, 40C
Cool, 4°C
NaOH to pH >12, 0.6g
Ascorbic acidd
None required
HN03 to pH <2
If not analyzed immediately,
Holding timeb
14 days
14 days
48 hours
6 hours
No holding
48 hours
28 days
No holding
28 days
No holding
24 hours
28 days
48 hours
28 days
14 days
28 days
6 months
7 days
collect under acid. Add
90 ml of sample to 10 ml
(1 + 9) HC1
-------
(continued)
Parameter
Iodide
Iodine
Metals (Except Cr VI)
Dissolved
Suspended
Total
Nitrogen
Ammonia
Kjeldahl (total)
Nitrate plus Nitrite
Nitrate
Nitrite
Oil & Crease
Collection
technique
Grab or composite
Grab only
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab only
Container3 Preservation
P,G Cool 4°C
P,G Determine onsite
P,G Filter onsite, HN03 to
pH < 2
P,G Filter onsite
P,G HN03 to PH < 2
P,G Cool, 4°C, H2S04 to
pH < 2
P,G Cool, 4°C, H2S04 to
pH < 2
P.G Cool, A°C, H2S04 to
pH < 2
P,C Cool, 4°C, H2S04 to
pH < 2
P.G Cool, 4°C
G Cool 4°C, H2S04 to
Holding time''
24 hours
No holding
6 months, except
Hg— 28 days
6 months, except
Hg— 28 days
6 months, except
Hg— 28 days
28 days
28 days
28 days
48 hours
48 hours
28 days
Organics
Extractables (base/
neutrals and acids)
pH < 2
Grab or composite G, Teflon- Cool, 4°C
lined cap
7 days until
extraction, 30 days
after extraction
-------
(continued)
Parameter
Organics (cont.)
Purgeables (halocarbons-
a roma tics)
Purgeables (acrolein and
acrylonitrile)
Pesticides and PCbs
PH
Phenol
Phosphorus
Ortho phosphate
Phosphorus, Total
Radioactivity
Silica
Dissolved
Total
Solids
Dissolved
Volatile Dissolved
Suspended
Collection
technique Container3 Preservation
Grab only C, Teflon- Cool, 4°C
lined cap
Grab only G, Teflon- Cool, 4°C
lined cap
Grab or composite G, -Teflon- Cool, 4°C
lined cap
Grab only P,G Determine onsite
Grab or composite G Cool, 4°C, H2^°it co PH <2
Grab or composite P,G Filter onsite, cool, 4°C
Grab or composite P,G Cool, 4°C, ^SO,?, to
pH <2
Grab or composite P,G HN03 to pH <2
Grab or composite P Cool, 4°C
Crab or composite F Cool, 4°C
Grab or composite P,G Cool, 4°C
Grab or composite P,G Cool, 4°C
Grab or composite P,G Cool, 4°C
Holding timeb
14 days
14 days
7 days until
extraction, 30 days
after extraction
2 hours
24 hours
48 hours
28 days
6 months
28 days
28 days
7 days
7 days
7 days
-------
(continued)
Parameter
Solids (cont.)
Volatile Suspended
Total
Volatile Total
Settleable
Sulfate
Sulfide
Sulf ite
Surfactants
TOC
TOX
Turbidity
aP « Polyethylene, G =
bThe holding times are
EPA -600/4-8 2-055 and
Collection
technique
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Grab or composite
Glass, Pro = Polypropylene
those listed in Technical
Container3
P.C
P.G
P.C
P.G
P.G
P.G
P.G
P.G
G, Teflon-
lined cap
G, Amber,
Teflon-lined
cap
P.G
Additions to
Methods for Organic Chemical Analysis of
Preservation
Cool, 4°C
Cool, 4°C
Cool, 4°C
Cool, 4°C
Cool, 4°C
Cool, 4°C, 2 ml zinc acetate
plus NaOH to ph > 9
Determine onsite
Cool, 4°C
Cool, 4"C, HC1 to pH <2
Cool, 4°C, add 1 ml 0.1 M
sodium sulfite
Cool, 4°C
Methods for Chemical Analysis
Holding timeb
7 days
7 days
7 days
48 hours
28 days
7 days
No holding
48 hours
28 days
7 days
48 hours
of Water and Wastes,
Municipal and Industrial Uastewater, EPA-600/4-82-057.
clf samples cannot be filtered within 48 hours, add 1 ml of a 2.712 solution of mercuric chloride to inhibit bacterial
growth.
dShould only be used in the presence of residual chlorine.
-------
USES OF GENERAL PURPOSE OECON SOLUTIONS
TYPE OF HAZARD
PREFERRED DECON SOLUTION
DIRECTIONS FOR PREPARATION
1. Inorganic acids, metal processing wastes
2. Heavy metals - mercury, lead, cadmium, etc.
3. Pesticides, fungicides, chlorinated
phenols, dloxlns, PCPs
4. Cyanides, ammonia and other non-acidic
Inorganic wastes
5. Solvents and organic compounds such as
trlchloroethylene, chloroform and toluene
6. PBB's and PCB's
7. Oily, greasy unspecified wastes
8. Inorganic bases, alkali and caustic waste
A
A
B
B
C (or A)
C (or A)
C
D
To 10 gallons of water, add 4
pounds of sodium carbonate
(soda lime) and 4 pounds of
trl sodium phosphate. Stir
until evenly mixed.
Same as 11 above
To 10 gallons of water, add
8 pounds of calcium hypochlorlte.
Stir with wooden or plastic
stlrrer until evenly mixed.
Same as 13 above
To 10 gallons of water, add
4 pounds of trl sodium phosphate.
Stir until evenly mixed.
Same as 15 above
Same as 15 above
To 10 gallons of water, add
1 pint of concentrated
hydrochloric acid. Stir with
a wooden or plastic stlrrer.
-------
|